` with a unique parent class name, for example:
```
Then each style defined in your CSS file should use that parent selector to define the styles. Setting the font-size of the <legend> element, for example will look like:
.dealer-name legend \{
font-size: 16px;
\}
Your style sheets will always be included after the default Photo Finale style sheets, so it is therefore possible for you to override any of the default PF styling by omitting the **.dealer-name** scope, for example:
legend \{
font-size: 16px;
\}
We recommend ***against*** overriding the default Photo Finale styling, except as noted below. Photo Finale cannot take responsibility nor provide engineering resources to help diagnose or debug problems caused by overrides to the default styles. Ensuring that the default styling is compatible with all supported browsers on OS X and Windows is enough fun for us already!
Most PF Enterprise sites will need to override certain PF layout styles, shown here. The values of the #header.pageLayout height and #content.fullpage top should be the same and should represent the actual height of your header content.
**/\* Photo Finale Overrides \*/**
#pageWrapper \{
background: none;
box-shadow: none;
max-width: 100%;
\}
#header \{
background: none;
height: 78px;
border: none;
\}
.fullpage #content \{
top: 78px;
\}
#footer \{
background: none;
\}
The following fonts are included in the platform's CSS, so they can be used in custom Umbraco content without being linked.
- Exo (400, 700, 700 italic)
- Lato (400, 700)
- Montserrat (400, 700)
- Open Sans (400, 700)
- Poppins (100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700)
- Roboto (400, 700)
- Roboto Condensed (400, 700)
Your site can have as many custom pages as you care to build. These page are often referred to as "marketing pages", "landing pages", or "Umbraco pages".
You have control over the page hierarchy which dictates the URL. To determine the URL for a page, simply append the folder path to your site domain, following these substitution rules:
- Strip all non-alphanumeric characters except for hyphen and period
- Convert any spaces to a hyphen
- Convert any & characters to "and"
Example:
**PATH: / example folder / subfolder! / page with & in the name**
URL: /example-folder/subfolder/page-with-and-in-the-name
To create pages and folders, simply click on the "..." icon at the level you wish to insert from and then choose to insert either a folder or a page.
**NOTE**
Content pages can have subpages. Therefore the only difference between a folder and a content page is that if the user hits a URL for a folder itself, they will get a 404 error since there is no content. For that reason we recommend using content pages instead of folder in virtually all circumstances.
The following names are reserved by Photo Finale and should not be used as page or folder names within Umbraco. This list may change from time to time.
- account
- addphotos
- ccvinfo
- changepassword
- checkout
- confirmation
- create
- default
- feedback
- forgotpassword
- get
- getstarted
- gift
- gifts
- guest
- help
- home
- link
- members
- membershipinfo
- migrateuser
- mobile
- mycart
- mycollections
- myfeeds
- myorders
- myphotos
- orderhistory
- optout
- photo
- photos
- photofeed
- platform
- prepaidplans
- pricelist
- print
- prints
- projects
- share
- shop
- signin
- signout
- signup
- signupcomplete
- startsharing
- stores
- terms
- trackmyorder
- trackorder
- transfercontent
- unsubscribe
- upgrade
- user
These characters may not be used in an Umbraco page name:
- '
- "
- !
- %
- .
- ;
- /
- \
- :
- #
- +
- \*
- &
- ?
- >
- <
- \_
Photo Finale includes a number of JS libraries. Umbraco content that includes these same libraries (or different versions of them) will likely cause conflicts and should be avoided. Please use the ***View Source*** feature in your browser to check which libraries/versions are being included.
PF Enterprise provides a JavaScript object ("PF") this is available to be used in Umbraco pages and PageParts.
**General Data Members**
PF.dealer.name = "Silverline Demo Lab";
PF.dealer.code = "9071";
PF.dealer.country = "US";
PF.dealer.currencyCode = "USD";
PF.dealer.currencySumbol = "$";
PF.dealer.email = "lab@silverlinephoto.com";
PF.dealer.phone = "703-564-3400";
PF.user.isAuthenticated = false;
PF.region = 'en-US';
PF.cultureInfo.name = 'en-US';
PF.cultureInfo.displayName = "English (US)";
PF.domain = '[https://silverline.photofinale.com](https://silverline.photofinale.com)';
PF.authenticationUrl = '[https://silverline.photofinale.com/signin](https://silverline.photofinale.com/mobile/signin)';
PF.basketId = "2d036975-c2e3-48f3-8c22-7b7f631e631e";
On the order confirmation page, an orderSummary object is also available:
**Order Data Members (only available in the ConfirmationExtra PagePart)**
PF.orderSummary.confirmation : int
PF.orderSummary.subTotal : number
PF.orderSummary.discount : number
PF.orderSummary.tax : number
PF.orderSummary.shipping : number
PF.orderSummary.total : number
PF.orderSummary.balanceDue.valueOf() : number
PF.orderSummary.items : array
PF.orderSummary.items[0].productId : int
PF.orderSummary.items[0].productName : string
PF.orderSummary.items[0].quantity : int
PF.orderSummary.items[0].price : number
PF.orderSummary.coupons : array
PF.orderSummary.coupons[0] : string
In order to register order completion with 3rd-party shopping cart tracking scripts, the ConfirmationExtra-mobile PagePart can be used. Within that PagePart, the PF.orderSummary object described above will be available for use.
If a 3rd-party integration includes a call to load an external script, that script will be loaded asynchronously meaning that any JS commands you place immediately afterwards may run ***before*** the script is actually loaded.
**Loading a 3rd-Party Script**
```js
```
To combat this, you may need to wrap the subsequent integration code into an anonymous function that waits until the objects from the 3rd-party script are loaded and available to be used.
Here's an example that creates an anonymous function to check for the existence of the 3rd-party tracker's object ("MyTracker" in our example) and then calls the fictitious "TrackOrder" method passing along the order # and total.
**Wait For 3rd-Party Script Before Using It**
```js
( function _trackerScript() {
if (typeof (MyTracker) == "undefined") {
setTimeout(function () { _trackerScript(); }, 500);
} else {
MyTracker.TrackOrder(PF.orderSummary.confirmation, PF.orderSummary.total);
}
})();
```
Since the Photo Finale site is a Single Page Application ([SPA](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Single-page_application)), there aren't traditional page fetches from the server as the user navigates the site. If you wish to attach code to a particular page, you need to listen for the $pf-url-visited event and use the url parameter to identify the page the user has navigated to. For example:
```js
```
The Photo Finale Web platform is currently localized into French, Spanish, Italian, Finish, Norwegian, Swedish and Japanese. The site is designed to automatically select the most appropriate language based on the user's operating system locale settings when they first visit the site. However, it is a good idea to also provide a language selector on the page, often placed in the site footer. Once a user selects a language, that choice is stored in a cookie and will be utilized on future visits to the site.
To add your own, stylizable, language selector to your site you can use:
```js
```
Alternatively, you can utilize our default language selector on your custom page by using:
```js
Version 17.1 introduced the capability for individual language strings within the platform to be overridden by a dealer site. Begin by preparing a JSON object containing the strings you wish to override. This can include overrides in multiple languages, if desired. For example:
```js
{
"en-US": {
"SignIn_RememberMeLabel": "Don’t you dare forget me!",
"SignIn_Incorrect": "Nope! Try again."
},
"fr-CA": {
"SignIn_RememberMeLabel": "N'ose pas m'oublier !",
"SignIn_Incorrect": "Non! Essayer à nouveau."
}
}
```
The string ID (e.g. "SignIn\_Incorrect") can be found in the attached list of platform strings: [i18n-overrides-2025-05-30.json](/files/pf-website/pf-enterprise-faq/i18n-overrides-2025-05-30.json)
Once the string override JSON has been prepared, deliver it to your account representative for them to load into the platform.
**COMPATIBILITY ISSUE**
Due to a compatibility issue with recent versions of Umbraco, the Scheduled Publish feature is currently broken. Until this issue is resolved in a future PF Web release, do not schedule a future publish.
It is possible to schedule the publishing of a new page or update to an existing page for a future date/time.
1. On the Properties tab of the page, set a value in the "Publish at" field. The time should be specified for US Eastern Time.
2. Rather than hitting the normal **Save and publish** button, instead click on the arrow next to the button and choose to **Save** only.
**Note**
Due to local caching on the web servers, changes may not propagate to all web servers for up to 30 minutes from the time scheduled in Umbraco.
- **Put a ‘My Projects’ button in even for anonymous users.** For anonymous users, they are stored via cookies, just like the anonymous user's shopping cart.
- **Use relative links**. Relative links are best.
- **Linking to products/groups.** For the best SEO and future-proofing, always use links to products and categories as shown in the ***Web Links*** page of [myLab](https://mylab.photofinale.com).
- **Newsletter signup**. html can’t have a <form> within a <form>. The site is already wrapped in a <form> so any others get tossed out. The submit would need to be scripted or pop something up.
---
## Photo Finale Enterprise (PFE)
*Explore Photo Finale Enterprise (PFE): a responsive, customizable photography website with galleries, custom branding, and unlimited pages.*
Example of a regular Photo Finale PFE: [https://demo.photofinale.com/](https://demo.photofinale.com/)
A Proofing Gallery can be a PFE upgrade as well. It would be similar to the demo site
**Features:**
- responsive
- logo
- custom color
- tailored menu
- about section
- services section
- contact section
- social media buttons
- custom terms
- custom domain (optional, additional fees apply)
- unlimited additional pages (can include product info, services, contact, classes, etc.)
- custom slider and buttons
---
## Photo Finale Responsive Single Page (PFSR)
*Explore Photo Finale Responsive Single Page (PFSR) features, including responsive design, custom branding, tailored menus, and optional custom domain*
Example of a regular Photo Finale PFSR: [https://silverline.photofinale.com/](https://silverline.photofinale.com/)
Example of a Proofing Gallery PFSR: [https://pfphotography.photofinale.com/](https://pfphotography.photofinale.com/)
**Features:**
- responsive
- logo
- custom banner and buttons
- custom color
- tailored menu
- about section
- services section
- contact section
- social media buttons
- custom terms
- custom domain (optional, additional fees apply)
---
## Umbraco Script Library
*Explore the Umbraco Script Library for Photo Finale sites, featuring code examples for loading third-party scripts and customizing page text.*
Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Upgrade Options > [Photo Finale Enterprise (PFE)](..\..\Photo%20Finale%20Enterprise%20(PFE).md) > [PF Enterprise FAQ](/pf-website/photo-finale-upgrade-options/pf-enterprise-faq)
A collection of useful scripts for use on PFE / PFM / PFSR sites.
#### Load & Call a 3rd-Party Script
This example shows a 3rd-party script being loaded, and then the code waiting for the external script and the orderSummary object to exist before being invoked. This example would be appropriate on the ConfirmationExtra-mobile PagePart.
```js
```
#### Change a text string on a page
This example has been removed. The platform now has a built-in method (introduced in v17.1) for customizing text strings for a Dealer site, so the JavaScript workaround is no longer needed or recommended.
---
## Color Space (sRGB / Adobe RGB)
*Learn the differences between sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces and discover best practices for printing and displaying photos online.*
##### Understanding Color Space
The palette you're given for displaying photos on the web is called sRGB. When you upload to Photo Finale or Prestige Proofs the photo will be converted to this sRGB color space while viewing on the website, but your original image can be in any color space you choose.
Another popular color space is Adobe RGB, however very few windows-based or mobile-based browsers can display Adobe RGB. When the customer views the image, it is displayed in sRGB. It is possible for a consumer to view Adobe RGB via a browser, but that is only in the Macintosh browser Safari, but only under conditions not normally found in everyday browsing.
##### Adobe RGB vs sRGB: what is the difference?
Most JPEG files are 8-bit, which means you get 256 reds, 256 blues, and 256 greens whether you use Adobe RGB or sRGB. The difference is the space between colors in Adobe is a bit broader and allows for a broader range of colors. However, there are finer increments of skin tone in using sRGB, for example. But the pure cyan in HP's original logo can only be accurately represented by Adobe RGB, whereas in sRGB, you'd have to pick a substitute color. The best (and shortest) explanation of these trade offs is below:
[http://www.cambridgeincolour.com/tutorials/sRGB-AdobeRGB1998.htm](http://www.cambridgeincolour.com/tutorials/sRGB-AdobeRGB1998.htm)
##### What's best for printing?
That depends on both the photo and the printer. Most commercial printers only support sRGB. This includes: WHCC, Bay Photo, Mpix, EZ Prints, Shutterfly, Kodak, Fujifilm, Photobox, Costco, Snapfish, etc.,
Since your customers are viewing and previewing the images via a browser or a mobile device, it is best to give them what they see. Very few people aside from high-end color experts notice that photos displayed in web browsers are limited by how many colors they can display.
If you want them to display well on the internet, sRGB is the only choice.
##### What is the best practice for a photographer?
Your camera captures images in RAW. Many high-end cameras give you the choice of converting, in camera, to Adobe RGB or sRGB before saving on a memory card. Sometimes the best workflow is to save your photos in Adobe RGB because it preserves the most colors, and convert to sRGB for the internet.
The problem with that is you get the disadvantages of both color spaces with the advantages of neither.
If sRGB covers the colors of your shots (as it does for weddings, portraits, and most event photography) and your shots are destined for the internet and commercial printers, we recommend they not pass through Adobe RGB first.
##### Some color experts are not fans of sRGB. Why?
The last thing a self-respecting color expert wants is to give up colors. They want monitors and printers that hit every color perfectly, and ICC profiles attached to each image. But the power of the internet is its simplicity. The internet works on TV and TV on the internet. Consumer devices like cell phones and TVs don't know about ICC profiles, and neither do consumer websites like CNN and eBay. They do know sRGB. Fortunately, 99.9% of us think photos look gorgeous on the internet, and it flourishes because of the simplicity of assuming every file is in sRGB.
##### What if I really want to print Adobe RGB?
It is possible in Photo Finale and Prestige Proofs to print via Adobe RGB. To accomplish this, you need to make sure you upload via the Proofing Gallery website, and not allow the customer to crop or render the file. (This only works for prints, not books or other creative products.) So, every print size needs to be the same aspect ratio as you are shooting. If you shoot 2:3 aspect, then your print options need to be the same (4x6,6x9,8x12), etc.
Once the customer renders the image as a card or book, the file will be converted to sRGB.
In addition, the flag “Normalize for sRGB” needs to be turned off in Lab 50.
##### Quick reference
- If a customer has an sRGB, the image will stay sRGB.
- If a customer has an Adobe RGB image,
- Upload Express – it will be converted automatically by our system to sRGB
- Upload Fast – It will be converted automatically by our system to sRGB.
- Upload Large – The image profile and color space will be uploaded to our system, however, the thumbnail and viewable image will be sRGB.
- - - If a customer uploaded a Large image as Adobe RGB,
- Prints an aspect correct image without cropping, it will maintain its profile
- If the customer crops the image, it will be converted to sRGB
- If the customer adds text, or borders, or a creative product, it will be converted to sRGB.
- If a customer uploaded a large image as Adobe RGB, printed an aspect correct print,
- - - If sent to a printer that only supports sRGB, then you need to have the “normalize for color space” option on in the print driver.
- If sent to a printer that supports Adobe RGB, then you need to have the “normalize for color space” option turned off in the print driver.
##### Best practices
All this being said, the best practice for a photographer who is displaying images online for printing is to:
- Shoot images in RAW
- Save to ADOBE RGB for work digitally.
- When uploading to your site or any site, convert via Photoshop or Lightroom to sRGB. (Those programs are better than us at the conversion.)
- Upload sRGB for viewing by consumers and printing. There are several reasons
- Phones / mobile devices only support sRGB for viewing
- Most consumer browsers only support sRGB for viewing
- Most of your printers only support sRGB for printing
- Most wholesalers only support sRGB.
---
## Corrupted state.xml Issue
##### Behavior and Issue:
If you are experiencing the following issues, you may have a corrupted state.xml issue in your lab 50 installation:
- The option to save your login credentials is selected, but lab 50 loses them everytime the software is closed and re-opened
- Orders appear in lab 50, but you are not able to print them, and they do not display the normal order processing screens
- Please locate your local copy of the state.xml file, usually found in *\*C:\Program Files (x86)\Photo Finale Print 50\**, and open the file in Notepad. If it opens up and the contents of the file are blank, then the state.xml file needs to be replaced.
##### Fixing the Issue:
If the file appears to be empty, replace your existing copy with the one found attached to this email or Web Page below. You will need to re-enter your lab 50 login credentials upon replacing this file. This includes entering your proper dealer code. To enter your dealer code click the Switch Accounts button on the log-in page.
### State.xml file to download:
| File | Modified |
|:---------------------------------------|:---------------|
| [state.xml](..\..\..\attachments\.xml) | by Russ McIver |
---
## How to Access Log Information
*Access Lab 50 log files via Settings > Diagnostics > General or directly from the installation folder to troubleshoot software errors.*
Lab 50 will automatically create logs of errors as they appear in the software. You can access these through Lab 50 by clicking on **Settings > Diagnostics > General**, and then clicking on the button labeled *Open the trace folder*. Alternatively, you can access the log files directly on the machine by accessing **C:\Program Files\Lucidiom Lab 50 7.0\Log** if you have used the default installation path for Lab 50.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Diagnostics > General |
Additionally, you can change the amount of information saved while recording logs from within the same window. You can select from *Error, Information, or Verbose*. The default installation sets this option to *Error*, and you should not change this setting unless otherwise instructed by support.
##### Order Event Log
The Order Event Log controls which error messages are visible to the lab operator while using Lab 50. The default settings include showing any warning messages or errors that occur in the software. If you'd prefer to not have error messages display at all, you can deselect the option boxes.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Diagnostics > Order Event Log |
---
## Lab 50 Invoice Customizations and Macros
The Lab 50 invoice uses html as a template for printing the invoice. This template can be modified by opening it with Notepad or another html editor while Lab 50 is closed. There are several macros that can be used to pull data from the order and print it on the invoice.
To edit the invoice, you will first need to make a back-up copy of the current invoice reference file.
The invoice.htm file can be found in the Lab 50 installation directory, typically located here: **c*:\Program Files (x86)\Photo Finale Print 50\Resources\en-US\Invoice***
Supported macros for editing the invoice are the following:
| **Names** | **Macro** | **Description** |
|:------------------------------|:--------------------------------------|:--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Company Logo | !COMPANY\_LOGO! | Lab logo |
| Company Name | !COMPANY\_NAME! | Lab name |
| Company Street | !COMPANY\_STREET! | Lab street address |
| Company City | !COMPANY\_CITY! | Lab city |
| Company State | !COMPANY\_STATE! | Lab state/province |
| Company Zip | !COMPANY\_ZIP! | Lab zip/postal code |
| Company Phone | !COMPANY\_PHONE! | Lab phone number |
| Company Email | !COMPANY\_EMAIL! | Lab email address |
| Order Number | !ORDER\_NUMBER! | Order confirmation number |
| Order Date | !ORDER\_DATE! | Date order was placed |
| Order Summary | !ORDER\_SUMMARY! | Summary of the order |
| Order Details | !ORDER\_DETAILS! | Details of the order |
| Order Subtotal | !ORDER\_SUBTOTAL! | Subtotal (item total) |
| Order Subtotal After Discount | !ORDER\_SUBTOTAL\_AFTER\_DISCOUNT! | Subtotal with discount applied |
| Order Service Fee | !ORDER\_SERVICE\_FEE! | Optional Service fee |
| Order Rush Fee | !RUSH\_ORDER\_FEE! | Optional Rush Order fee |
| Order Shipping Total | !ORDER\_SHIPPING\_TOTAL! | Shipping total |
| Order Tax Total | !ORDER\_TAX\_TOTAL! | Tax total |
| Order Discount Total | !ORDER\_DISCOUNT\_TOTAL! | Discount total (price tiers & coupons/promotions) |
| Order Total | !ORDER\_TOTAL! | Grand total |
| Order Prints Total | !ORDER\_PRINTS\_TOTAL! | Total quantity of order items |
| Order Prints Unique | !ORDER\_PRINTS\_UNIQUE! | Number of unique order items |
| Order Source | !ORDER\_SOURCE! | Source of the order (Photo Finale / APM) |
| Order Gift Text | !ORDER\_GIFT\_TEXT! | Text on gifting items |
| Bill To Header | !BILLTO\_HEADER! | Displays "Bill To" |
| Bill To First Name | !BILLTO\_FIRSTNAME! | Billing first name |
| Bill To Last Name | !BILLTO\_LASTNAME! | Billing last name |
| Bill To Street | !BILLTO\_STREET! | Billing street address |
| Bill To City | !BILLTO\_CITY! | Billing city |
| Bill To State | !BILLTO\_STATE! | Billing state/province |
| Bill To Zip | !BILLTO\_ZIP! | Billing zip/postal code |
| Bill To Phone | !BILLTO\_PHONE! | Billing phone number |
| Bill To Email | !BILLTO\_EMAIL! | Billing email |
| Ship To Header | !SHIPTO\_HEADER! | Displays "Ship To" |
| Ship To First Name | !SHIPTO\_FIRSTNAME! | Shipping first name |
| Ship To Last Name | !SHIPTO\_LASTNAME! | Shipping last name |
| Ship To Street | !SHIPTO\_STREET! | Shipping street address |
| Ship To City | !SHIPTO\_CITY! | Shipping city |
| Ship To State | !SHIPTO\_STATE! | Shipping state/province |
| Ship To Zip | !SHIPTO\_ZIP! | Shipping zip/postal code |
| Ship To Phone | !SHIPTO\_PHONE! | Shipping phone number |
| Ship to Email | !SHIPTO\_Email! | Shipping email |
| Shipping Method | !SHIPPING\_METHOD! | Shipping method |
| Special Instructions | !SPECIAL\_INSTRUCTIONS! | Special instructions |
| Detail Description | !DETAIL\_DESCRIPTION! | Product name/description for a given order item |
| Detail Photos | !DETAIL\_PHOTOS! | Photo name(s) used for a given order item |
| Detail Quantity | !DETAIL\_QUANTITY! | Quantity purchased for a given order item |
| Detail Price | !DETAIL\_PRICE! | Order item unit price (excludes discount) |
| Detail Total | !DETAIL\_TOTAL! | Order item total price (includes discount) |
| Summary Description | !SUMMARY\_DESCRIPTION! | Product name/description for a given product |
| Summary Quantity | !SUMMARY\_QUANTITY ! | Total quantity purchased for a given product |
| Summary Total | !SUMMARY\_TOTAL! | Total price for a given product |
| APM Store Info | !APM\_STORE\_INFO! | Store information |
| APM Store ID | !APM\_STORE\_ID! | Store ID sent from APM |
| APM Store Name | !APM\_STORE\_NAME! | Store name sent from APM |
| APM Store Street | !APM\_STORE\_STREET! | Store address sent from APM |
| APM Store City | !APM\_STORE\_CITY! | Store city sent from APM |
| APM Store State | !APM\_STORE\_STATE! | Store state/province sent from APM |
| APM Store Zip | !APM\_STORE\_ZIP! | Store zip/postal code sent from APM |
| APM Store Country | !APM\_STORE\_COUNTRY! | Store country sent from APM |
| APM Store Phone | !APM\_STORE\_PHONE! | Store phone number sent from APM |
| APM Store Contact Name | !APM\_STORE\_CONTACTNAME! | Store contact name sent from APM |
| APM Store contact Email | !APM\_STORE\_CONTACTEMAIL! | Store email address sent from APM |
| APM Fulfillment Type | !APM\_FULFILLMENT\_TYPE! | Type of fulfillment used on APM |
| Bucket Count | !BUCKET\_COUNT! | The total number of unique print sizes in the order. Only valid for invoices printed in Advance Invoice mode with the "Print individual invoice for each product type" option enabled. |
| Bucket Index | !BUCKET\_INDEX! | The index of the current bucket for the invoice being printed. Only valid for invoices printed in Advance Invoice mode with the "Print individual invoice for each product type" option enabled. |
| Bucket Product | !BUCKET\_PRODUCT! | The product corresponding to the current bucket. Only valid for invoices printed in Advance Invoice mode with the "Print individual invoice for each product type" option enabled. |
| Paper Surface | !PAPER\_SURFACE! | The surface type the customer selected (where appropriate): "Glossy" or "Matte". |
| Payment Due | !ORDER\_PAYMENT\_DUE! | The order total minus any amount already paid online when the order was placed (e.g. via PayPal). |
| Payment Due Excluding Tax | !ORDER\_PAYMENT\_DUE\_EXCLUDING\_TAX! | The order total minus tax and any amount already paid online when the order was placed (e.g. via PayPal). Useful if you wish to calculate tax in-store on your POS. |
| Product Personalization | !PERSONALIZATION\_SUMMARY! | An aggregate of the personalization options for all applicable products in the order. |
#### Adding Scannable Barcodes to the Invoice
In many cases barcode readers require a start and stop digit to read the code. When editing one of the receipt/shipping/ invoice labels, these stop digits, usually defined by a "\*" are necessary.
The example below shows a snippet of the html file for a barcode of the order number with an asterisk as the start and stop digit.
**Sample html with Barcode ORDER NUMBER Macro**
```html
```
---
## Lab 50 Troubleshooting and FAQs
### Reporting Issues to Support
If you should encounter an error while using Lab 50, there are many resources available for troubleshooting the problem via internal logging tools. Information you should include when contacting support via phone or email includes the following:
- The full software version as shown on the **Home** tab of Lab 50
- Any error messages that appear on both the **General** and **Details** tabs
- The event in progress at time of the error. ie. Were you trying to print an order? Mark it complete? Burn a DVD? etc.
- Any log files found in **C:\Program Files\Lucidiom Lab 50 7.0** or the path of your Lab 50 installation
- Any information that may be relevant to the error. ie. You are getting an error while printing, but the same order printed fine yesterday. One order will not print, but the others all print fine. etc.
Providing this information upfront will help to speed up the progress of determining the problem in the software.
Locate and read Lab 50's log files when diagnosing an issue.
Identify and resolve a corrupted state.xml file.
Customize invoice templates and macros in Lab 50.
Restore orders from the local backup when needed.
Steps to reset Lab 50's local database.
Understand color space differences and their effect on prints.
---
## Reimporting Lab 50 orders from the Local Backup
If the option to backup kiosk orders is checked, they will be available for a period of time on the designated folder that you have setup in Lab 50.
The order should still be available on your LAB 50 machine in **C:\Program Files\Lucidiom Lab 50 7.0\Import\Backup**, assuming you have used the default installation paths for the software. If you have your orders imported into a different folder, which you can check by accessing Settings > Order Management > Importing in Lab 50, then the backup folder will be within that folder.
Simply copy and paste the order folder into the import directory **C:\Program Files\Lucidiom Lab 50 7.0\Import** to reimport the order into LAB 50.
This should happen when Lab 50 is closed to prevent Lab 50 from attempting to immediately import the orders while it is still copying, as this is prone to happen with large orders.
---
## Resetting the Local Database
*Learn how to reset the Lab 50 local database to fix calendar grid errors, order download issues, and other caching problems safely.*
These steps correct an issue with the February 2013 calendar grid (half of it was showing up). The file was corrupt and has been fixed, but since it’s cached in Lab 50 you are still setting the bad file. These are the steps to clear the cache and have Lab 50 download the correct template. We call this “resetting the local database.” There are a wide variety of other issues that resetting the database may resolve with Lab 50--if it's not downloading an order after several attempts or if you are seeing odd error messages when attempting to process orders etc., but you should consult a Lucidiom support rep on the issue before proceeding with a reset.
##### Resetting the Local Database: Side Effects
You may want to do this at the end of the day, or whenever you have the shortest (or better yet, empty) print/order queue because performing the database reset means:
- **Any kiosk order that was in the Orders tab will no longer be there after the reset.** You can still get to and print or reprint orders as long as you have the backup folder option enabled (Settings>Order Management>Importing>Backup Imported Orders). You will need to move orders from the backup folder to the import folder to print them. **(Note: if you do not have backups on, once you reset the database, there is no way to recover kiosk orders).**
- All data related to orders placed online will be removed from the Orders tab, but the next time you start Lab 50 it will download the online order data again. Keep in mind though, the more online orders the lab has received the longer this process will take.
##### How to Reset the Local Database
1. Quit Lab 50
2. Go to the root directory (default location is C:\Program Files\Lucidiom Lab 50 or (for 64bit) C:\Program Files (x86)\Lucidiom Lab 50).
3. Delete the Temp folder
4. Delete the Photos folder
5. Delete the LabData.sdf file (this is the database file)
6. Restart Lab 50 and allow time for the online order data to download
7. Move any kiosk orders that need to be printed/reprinted from the backup folder to the import folder. They will show up as new orders once you do this.
1. Path to Import folder:
WinXP or Win7 32bit: C:\Program Files\Lucidiom Lab 50\Import
Win7 64bit: C:\Program Files (x86)\Lucidiom Lab 50\Import
2. Path to Backup folder:
WinXP or Win7 32bit: C:\Program Files\Lucidiom Lab 50\Import\Backup
Win7 64bit: C:\Program Files (x86)\Lucidiom Lab 50\Import\Backup
---
## Adding a New Channel
*Learn how to add a new auto enhancement channel by configuring color, advanced, and product settings in Settings > Photo Processing.*
To create a new channel, navigate to **Settings > Photo Processing > Auto Enhancement**.
| |
|:-------------------------------------|
|  |
| Color Tab |
|  |
| Advanced Tab |
|  |
| Products Tab |
1. Click on the **Add** button to open the new channel window.
2. Under the **General** tab, fill in the following settings:
- **Name:** Name of the channel
- **Description:** A description for the channel for easy reference in the lab
- **Enable this Channel:** Check the box to enable the channel
3. Under the **Color** tab, use the slide bars to configure the color corrections that are to be made to the image. The following options are available:
- Highlight Contrast
- Shadow Contrast
- Shadow Desaturation
- Saturation
- Brightness
- RGB color values
4. Under the **Advanced** tab, you can apply additional corrections including the following:
- Red Eye Reduction
- Noise Reduction
- Brightness Adjustment
- Color Sharpness
- Shadow Values
- Highlight Values
5. Under the **Products** tab, select the products to which you would like to apply the color enhancement settings in use for this channel.
6. Once complete, Click **OK**.
7. (*Optional*) If you wish to create different I2E profiles for products created on different output devices, repeat these steps for each device.
---
## Auto-Enhancement
*To use the auto enhancement feature in Lab 50, you'll first need to enable it within the Photo Processing screen.*
To use the auto enhancement feature in Lab 50, you'll first need to enable it within the **Photo Processing** screen.
1. At the top of the **Menu** bar, select **Settings**.
2. On the left panel select **Photo Processing > Auto Enhancement**.
3. Check the box ***Enable auto enhancement processing***.
4. Click on the **Add** button at the bottom of the right panel to begin the setup of a new Channel.
| |
|:----------------------------------|
|  |
5. When the new dialogue box appears, enter a **Name** for the New Channel (Ex. Minilab).
6. (*Optional*) In the **Description** field, enter a brief description of the channel (Ex. This is the I2E channel for our minilab to sharpen and redden images for color accuracy).
7. Leave the box ***Enable this Channel*** checked.
8. (*Optional*) A sample image may be used as a litmus test for the settings for this channel. Click on the \_Select a
preview photo\_ link, and then locate the image you would like to use as a sample using the windows dialog box. You can also change this image at any time to see how the settings affect different test images.
| |
|:----------------------------------|
|  |
\*\***Note:** The sample image(s) needs to be a Jpeg file and in landscape formatting.
---
## ColorFlow
#####
ColorFlow is a feature in Lab 50 and Print 50 that allows you to use a color correction software to alter images prior to flattening/rendering into the product so you can color-correct images separately from the other elements of a creative project. You may still like to correct images in PJP or Fuji for prints, but for books, cards, calendars and the like ColorFlow is the answer. The products that it really has an impact on are collages (metal, canvas, etc), books, and calendars.
##### YouTube demo
##### The Basics
ColorFlow is set up in Lab 50, in the Photo Processing section. From there you create as many channels as you need. Channels can be by product, group of products or global. Each channel will allow you to move production in the manner that makes sense for the correction. You can a channel for each product, groups of products, or all products. The correction can be done on a Noritsu PJP, Fuji Pic, Athentech, Photoshop, Darkroom Pro, or any other program you like.
Once you have it set up, the lab workflow goes like this:
1. Book order comes into Lab 50, you hit Print as you normally do.
2. Images are sent from the book to the folder you designate.
3. Your correction program either automatically or manual picks up images, you make the corrections then save them to a different folder.
4. Lab 50 triggers and picks up corrected images, pulls them back into the book, flattens it the photos in with the text, background, and layout, and it goes to print.
##### Enable ColorFlow
Enable it on the **Photo Processing** screen in Lab 50:
1. At the top of the **Menu** bar, select **Settings**.
2. On the left panel select **Photo Processing > ColorFlow**.
3. Check the box ***Enable ColorFlow processing***.
##### Configure a new workflow for editing photos
1. Click **Add** at the bottom of the right panel.
2. On the **General** tab, enter a name for the workflow and check ***Enable this workflow***.
- **Name:** A name for your new Workflow. This field is required. Lucidiom Support recommends a brief description of products included and/or sizing information. Example: Standard prints, up to 8x10
- **Description:** A description of the Workflow. This may be used internally to add additional identifying information such as where the photos will be stored or what type of processing will be done.
- **Enable this Workflow:** The check box enables the use of the Workflow for the selected settings. To temporarily disable a Workflow, un-check the box.
3. For the **Outbound** tab, select how you would like the software to handle orders being sent through this workflow. Your choices are: export to a new folder, create order subfolders, and require lab operator interaction to start the ColorFlow processing in lieu of automatically exporting.
- **Require operator interaction:** If this option is checked, orders will not be sent through for ColorFlow processing until a lab operator manually clicks the **SEND** button. Please see the screenshot to the right captioned *"Orders Queued for ColorFlow Processing"* as an example of the on-screen notification.
- **Copy photos to folder:** This option makes a copy of the photos for the ColorFlow processing. This setting is generally *recommended*, otherwise the color correction will be applied to the original photos. If this option is checked, you'll need to enter the folder path to use for saving a copy of the order photos. You should enter the full path to the folder. You may use a local folder, mapped network drive, or network path as long as the user account has read/write access to the necessary folder. If the location for storage is on a networked computer, Lucidiom Support recommends using the UNC path to access the location to minimize connection issues. Example: \_\\labserver\StandardPrints\_
1. - **Create order subfolders:** To create individual order folders within your destination folder, check this box.
- **Override order folder suffix:** To change the order folder suffix (normally ".order"), check this box and enter the preferred suffix. Do not enter the '.'; for example, if you want the suffix to be ".colorflow", simply enter "colorflow" in this field.
- **Mask order folder (with .tmp) until complete:** Enabling this option will temporarily rename the order folder to xxxxxxx.order.tmp, where xxxxxxx is the order number, until all processing through ColorFlow is complete.
- **Create job file :** To create a file containing the order number and a list of all photos included in the order, check this box.
- **File format:** The job file may be formatted as **XML** or plain **Text**. Select the radio button that corresponds with your preferred formatting.
- **File location:** The job file may be output to the standard **Photos folder** within your Lab 50 configuration, or to another folder by selecting **Other** and entering a location. Lucidiom Support recommends that if you are including a job file that it is output to the same location as your photos folder specified under the *"Copy photos to folder"* location.
- **Filename:** The name to use for the job file. Macros that may be entered and substituted at runtime include *%ORDER%* to use the order number or *%TIMESTAMP%* to include the date and time.
4. Under the **Inbound** tab, select how you would like Lab 50 to find the newly edited photos. The **Inbound** tab configures Lab 50 to find completed, ColorFlow-edited photos. Options include monitoring for photos in a new folder, checking for a folder name change, finding a completion file, or lab operator interaction indicating the editing is complete.
- **Completion Mechanism:**
- **Require operator interaction:** If this option is checked, orders will not be picked back up by Lab 50 after processing until a lab operator manually clicks the **DONE** button. Use this option when your ColorFlow workflow involves a manual color-correcting process, or the color station offers no automated way to indicate order completion.
- **Monitor output folder for completion:** Enabling folder monitoring will cause Lab 50 to continually monitor the inbound folder until it contains the same number of photos as were sent out for the order to begin with. If this setting is used, it is recommended that the "Pause after completion" option also be used, to ensure that the color station has time to finish copying the last photo into the folder before Lab 50 begins processing it.
- **Completion file :** If this option is enabled, Lab 50 will mark ColorFlow processing as complete as soon as the specified file exists. The file itself does not need to contain any data, and can be empty. The full path to the file should be specified, and the %ORDER% and %TIMESTAMP% macros can be used. For example, *c:\ColorFlow\_Inbound%ORDER%.order\done.txt*.
- **Order folder name change:** If this option is enabled, Lab 50 will monitor the order folder and mark ColorFlow processing as complete as soon as the folder name is changed to match the entered name. A full path should be specified, and can include the %ORDER% and %TIMESTAMP% macros.
- **Inbound photo folder:**
- **Original outbound ColorFlow folder:** If your color correction will take place on the original files sent from Lab 50 (as configured in your Outbound tab settings) choose this option.
- **New folder:** If your color correction processing will output the edited photos to a new location, select this option. You should enter the full path to the new folder, and the %ORDER% and %TIMESTAMP% macros can be used. You may use a local folder, mapped network drive, or network path as long as the user account has read/write access to the necessary folder. If the location for storage is on a networked computer, Lucidiom Support recommends using the UNC path to access the location to minimize connection issues.
- **Pause after completion:** To add a delay between ColorFlow completion being recognized and Lab 50 continuing with its order processing, check this box and indicate the amount of time in seconds to delay. This setting is particularly recommended when the "Monitor output folder for completion" mode is used.
5. Using the **Products** tab, you will select which products to include or exclude from this Workflow. If you would like to process products differently according to product type, you will need to configure multiple Workflows.
- **Include all products and product types:** All products will be edited through ColorFlow using this Workflow configuration.
- **Include the selected products and product types:** Products that are checked in the box below the drop-down menu will be processed using this Workflow configuration.
- **Exclude the selected products and product types:** All products *except* the products checked in the box below the drop-down menu will be processed using this Workflow configuration.
6. Lastly, the **Sources** tab is used to specify which order types should use the Workflow for processing. You can also elect to ignore products that have been rendered at the kiosk should you decide to not offer this premium editing service for in-store orders.The sources tab is used to specify which types of orders are processed through the ColorFlow Workflow. To enable an option, check the box next to the corresponding type. To disable an option, un-check the box next to the corresponding type. For more details on each type of order, see below.
- **Web / Mobile Orders:** This option includes any orders received from your Photo Finale website, iPhone application, or third-party API.
- **Pickup Orders:** Any order for which the customer specifies pickup in-store.
- **Mail Orders:** Any order for which the customer specifies products should be shipped to his or her address.
- **Kiosk Orders:**
- **Express Orders:** Orders placed under fulfillment #1 on an APM. This may or may not be called "express" depending on your configuration.
- **Pickup Orders:** Orders placed under fulfillment #2 on an APM. This may or may not be called "pickup" depending on your configuration.
- **Mail Orders:** Orders placed under fulfillment #3 on an APM. This may or may not be called "mail" depending on your configuration.
- **Skip rendered folio products:** This setting correlates with configuration settings on the APM. If a kiosk has been configured to render products at the APM (which is the default behavior), enabling this setting will cause Lab 50 to skip the order rather than processing it through the ColorFlow Workflow. Enabling this setting is *recommended*. Processing pre-rendered images through a color correction workflow is generally not advised.
- **Skip folio products with rendering & xml data:** This setting correlates with configuration settings on the APM. If a kiosk has been configured to render products at the APM and Lab 50, enabling this setting will cause Lab 50 to skip the order rather than processing it through the ColorFlow Workflow. Enabling this setting is *recommended*, otherwise it would be advisable to change the APM settings to render at Lab 50 only.
Orders Queued for ColorFlow Processing
Lab 50 Monitoring for Photo Editing Completion
Order Editing Completed and Next Order Queued
##### ColorFlow Indicators on the orders screen
There are six order status values that may be displayed on the **Orders** screen while processing orders through ColorFlow. All ColorFlow status updates are prefaced with **ColorFlow:** and appear directly under the order number for any given order.
The order status indicators include the following:
- **Holding:** The *holding* status appears when ColorFlow has been configured to only process one order at a time. Options that will require single-order processing include the following:
- The option to *"Copy photos to folder"* is disabled under the **Outbound** tab.
- The option to *"Create Order Subfolder"* is disabled under the **Outbound** tab, and the option to *"Copy Photos to Folder"* does not include an %ORDER% macro.
- The *"New Folder"* option is enabled under **Inbound** tab > *"Photo Output Folder"*, but the *"New Folder"* path does not include an %ORDER% macro.
- **Ready to Send:** This status is displayed if the *"Require operator interaction to send"* option is enabled. To start the ColorFlow Workflow, the lab operator will need to manually click the **SEND** button.
- **Preparing:** This notification is displayed while Lab 50 is copying photos and any necessary order files to the editing folder for processing.
- **Waiting for Completion:** This option is displayed on-screen while Lab 50 monitors for processing completion. If the Workflow is configured to *"Require operator interaction to complete"*, a **DONE** button will be displayed for the operator to manually indicate completion. If the Workflow is configured to monitor the inbound folder, folder name, or for a file complete indicator, a spinning icon will be displayed until the required completion mechanism is reached through file count, folder renaming, or file creation.
- **Processing Output:** This notification is displayed while Lab 50 is copying edited files back into the database for rendering the final product(s).
- **Complete:** ColorFlow processing is complete, and the order will be sent to print after a slight pause to allow for the software cache to update.
##### FAQ
1. Can be used for any PF or kiosk product, from regular prints to cards, books and other products?
1. Yes.
---
## Photo Processing
*Learn how Lab 50 handles photo processing, including built-in editing, auto-enhancement, and ColorFlow for color-correcting images before printing.*
This section will briefly cover the editing options available through Lab 50. For information on configuring each option, click on the section title to be taken to the configuration details.
##### [Photo Editing](/print-50/photo-processing/photo-editing)
Lab 50 offers built-in photo editing and enhancement prior to printing. It also has the flexibility to use other third-party applications for editing photos.
You can edit photos from the orders screen simply by double-clicking on the image from the **Photos** tab. The image will by default open within the Lab 50 screen, but an alternate image viewer such as Adobe Photoshop, the default Windows Image viewer, or another preferred application may be configured for use as well. For information on editing with the Lab 50 software or configuring a third-party editing application, please see the section on configuring [Photo Editing](/print-50/photo-processing/photo-editing).
##### [Auto-Enhancement](/print-50/photo-processing/auto-enhancement)
Lab 50 has the ability to auto enhance images using a third-party algorithm. To ensure quality and production standards are met, specific channels can be assigned to manipulate the image characteristics of particular products. For information on configuring channels, please see the section on configuring [Auto-Enhancement](/print-50/photo-processing/auto-enhancement).
##### [ColorFlow](/print-50/photo-processing/colorflow)
ColorFlow is another editing option available in Lab 50. Using ColorFlow, lab operators can export photos from any ordered product and color-correct them using their favorite editor before Lab 50 assembles them into the final rendered pages/product. [How to set up ColorFlow.](/print-50/photo-processing/colorflow).
---
## Photo Editing
*To specify which editor should be used for manually correcting photos from Lab 50, you will need to configure the Photo Editing settings found under Photo*
To specify which editor should be used for manually correcting photos from Lab 50, you will need to configure the **Photo Editing** settings found under **Photo Processing**.
##### Selecting a Preferred Photo Editing Tool
1. At the top of the **Menu** bar, select **Settings**.
2. On the left panel, select **Photo Processing > Photo Editing**.
3. On the right panel, select the editor you would like to use.
4. After making the necessary changes, press **Apply Changes** or **Save and exit**.
| |
|:----------------------------------|
|  |
The built-in editor offers standard tools to adjust the photo orientation, lighting, and color. Once editing is complete, the changes may be applied to the original photo or saved as a new file, and the editor may continue on to the next photos within the order or closed after a quick, single photo edit.
| |
|:----------------------------------|
|  |
| Lab 50 Image Viewer |
---
## LAB/Print 50 advanced invoice options:
*Learn how to configure advanced invoice options in LAB/Print 50, including invoice, product label, and shipping label printer setup.*
The advanced invoice options are found in the software here: Settings > Order Management > Invoicing
The invoice files are html so can be customized. More on how to customize the content of the invoices here: [Lab 50 Invoice Customizations and Macros](/print-50/lab-50-troubleshooting-and-faqs/lab-50-invoice-customizations-and-macros)
**How to configure an advanced invoice:**
1) Navigate to Settings > Order Management > Invoicing.
2) Select the Advanced option and then 'add printer'
3) Specify the location of the invoice file you intend to use. In most cases that will be here: **C:\Program Files (x86)\Photo Finale Print 50\Resources\en-US\Invoice**
Our default install includes three different preconfigured files that can be used:
a) Invoice - Our standard invoice that includes order details and pricing information. Found here: **C:\Program Files (x86)\Photo Finale Print 50\Resources\en-US\Invoice**
b) Product Label - a condensed invoice intended for a label printer. Can be configured to print a separate label for each product included in the order. Includes customer name, order number and lists one of the product sizes. Found here: **C:\Program Files (x86)\Photo Finale Print 50\Resources\en-US\ProductLabel**
c) Shipping Label - Intended to be used for ship-to-home orders and printed on a label printer. Label will include the shipping address entered by the customer. Found here: **C:\Program Files (x86)\Photo Finale Print 50\Resources\en-US\ShippingLabel**
4) Select the intended printer from the drop down box:
5) Select whether the invoice should print automatically when the software receives orders of a certain type (kiosk/web, in-store/ship-to-home). Note: If you are configuring product labels you will want to check the box to 'print individual invoice for each product type.'
---
## Receipts and Invoices
*Learn how to customize Kiosk receipts and Print 50 HTML invoices, including file locations and macro options for tailored formatting.*
**On Kiosk**
You can customize the receipt that the kiosk prints, but changes are limited. The receipt file is here on the kiosk: C:\PF Kiosk\PrintServer\apmconfig\_receipt.xml
**On Print 50**
- The invoice format is html, so is more flexible for changes. The invoice file is here on the Print 50 computer: C:\Program Files (x86)\Photo Finale Print 50\Resources\en-US\Invoice\Invoice.htm
- Print 50 is also capable of printing a kiosk-style receipt using the print server (there is an option to print a receipt when print server processes an order). That file is found here on the Print 50 computer: C:\Program Files (x86)\Photo Finale Print 50\Tools\PrintServer\apmconfig\_receipt.xml
**Invoice Editing**
HTML tables are used, and you can edit as needed, including the use of macros. More info on this page: [Lab 50 Invoice Customizations and Macros](/print-50/lab-50-troubleshooting-and-faqs/lab-50-invoice-customizations-and-macros)
---
## Assigning Products to the D-Workflow Interface
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
After the D-Workflow interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane** will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Agfa D-Workflow interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to… or Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the D-Workflow Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure and edit D-Workflow interface settings in APM or Lab 50 software, including printer, host, and template options.*
To configure the APM or Lab 50 software for D-workflow, make sure a keyboard and mouse are attached then:
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the passcode (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Select the **Add Printer** option.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Agfa D-Workflow Interface**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter "DWF", or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the Add button.
6. Click on the newly created **Agfa D-Workflow** option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Agfa D-Workflow Options:**
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| D-Workflow - General Settings |
- **DB45 Path:** This setting should not be changed. This contains the path for the necessary D-Workflow folder/file structure to interface with D-Workflow properly. (Default is C:\APM\_FOLDERS\agfa\_db)
- **Debug Mode:** If after changing all of the settings, the D-Workflow interface does not work, come back into this screen and set Debug Mode to **True**. (Default is **False**.)
- **Dealer Name:** This is set in the pfdf file for the printer. This field should not be changed.
- **Dealer Number:** This setting is not used.
- **dWorkflow Host:** This needs to be set to the same IP address as the D-Workflow machine. (Default is **127.0.0.1** which is assuming that the D-Workflow is running on the local machine).
- **Machine ID:** This variable should be unique from other devices connecting to D-Workflow, including other APMs. The default value is **10**.
\*\***Note:** If you choose another ID, it must also be configured and authorized in the D-Workflow software.
- **Machine Type:** 122= Connection Kit in Agfa Terminology. This option should remain unchanged.
- **Operator Name:** This field will show up in the D-Workflow software.
- **Operator Number:** This setting is not used.
- **Connection Port:** This should remain unchanged. The default is **5001**. This port must be properly configured or opened for D-Workflow.
- **Purge complete orders:** This should be set to **True** if deleting orders from the queue after they are processed by D-Workflow is desired. The default value is **False**.
- **Back print template:** This setting is used to specify the information that needs to be collected from the order data file and printed on the back of each print. The default is **%ORDER%*%ITEM%*(%PRODUCT% %FINISH%)%QTY%**.
The following is a list of available, case-sensitive parameters that may be used:
- **%ORDER%** - Order Number
- **%PRODUCT%** - Product Name
- **%PROD\_ID%** - Product ID
- **%FINISH%** - Finish option (glossy/matte)
- **%QTY%** - Quantity
- **%ORIG\_FN%** - Original File Name
- **%ITEM%** - Item Index
- **%YEAR%** - Current 4 digit year
- **%MONTH%** - Current 2 digit month
- **%DAY%** - Current 2 digit day
- **%FNAME%** - Customer first name
- **%LNAME%** - Customer last name
- **%PHONE%** - Customer phone number
- **Glossy Surface:** The default value is 4. Please leave this setting as is.
- **Matte Surface:** The default value is 2. Please leave this setting as is.
---
## Agfa D-Workflow
*Configure the Agfa D-Workflow interface so the APM or Lab 50 software can convert and print orders through D-Workflow.*
The Agfa D-Workflow interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format that D-Workflow (version 2.64 or higher) can accept and print.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 software needs to be able to see the D-Workflow machine across the local area network and vice versa.
2. D-Workflow must be on version 2.64 or higher and use 28k ATTY files on the APM/Lab 50 and D-Workflow machines.
3. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up the D-Workflow Using Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the D-Workflow Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the Agfa D-Workflow Interface
*Learn how to configure Canvases and other products by setting paper widths in the Agfa D-Workflow interface to prevent order failures.*
| |
|:----------------------------------------|
|  |
| D-Workflow Product Configuration Window |
**Configuring Products:**
1. Select the **Canvases** line to highlight it (the area around **Canvases** will turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side.
3. This will launch the Product Paper Widths window. There are options to **Add**, **Edit**, or **Delete** each product.
4. For each product configured for D-Workflow, only the paper width (in mm) needs to be specified.
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
---
## Assigning Products to the DNP Dye-Sub Interface
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
After the DNP Dye-Sub interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization** Pane, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the DNP Dye-Sub interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one Product Matrix option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the DNP Dye-Sub Printer Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure DNP dye-sub printer interface settings in the Setup Wizard, including print size, queue delay, and printer options.*
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **DNP DS Printer**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter "DNP", or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **DNP Printer** option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**DNP DS Printer Options:**
- **Queue Delay (milliseconds):** The default setting is 1500 seconds. This value should not be changed.
- **Maximum Retries:** The default setting is 60. This value should not be changed.
- **Windows Printer Name:** Select the Windows printer driver name desired from the drop-down menu. The list of available printers is populated with all printers available in Windows.
- **Print Size:** Select the print size that will be processed on the printer. Available options include 4x6, 5x7, and 8x10.
- **Serial Number:** This field is polled by the Setup Wizard and populated with the information reported by the printer software.
- **Firmware Version:** This field is polled by the Setup Wizard and populated with the information reported by the printer software.
- **USB Port:** This field is polled by the Setup Wizard and populated with the information reported by the Windows printer drivers.
- **Ribbon Size:** This field is polled by the Setup Wizard and populated with the information reported by the Windows printer drivers.
If more than one printer is connected, repeat the above steps within the Printer Settings section for each additional printer. The DNP PS printer interface can accommodate up to four DNP printers attached to a single machine.
| |
|:--------------------------------|
|  |
| DNP DS Printer General Settings |
---
## DNP Dye-Sub Printer
The DNP Dye-Sub Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to print orders generated from an APM to one or more DNP printers directly attached to the machine. This interface enables special DNP capabilities, such as printer pooling, that are not in the Windows driver.
### Prerequisites
1. The Windows driver for the DNP printer(s) needs to be properly installed and configured to print the correct size on the APM or Lab 50 machine. This needs to be done BEFORE you begin setup of the printer within the APM or Lab 50 software.
2. The DNP Printer needs to have the latest firmware installed.
3. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up DNP Dye-Sub Printer Using Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the DNP Dye-Sub Printer Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Assigning Products to the Copal Dye-Sub Interface
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
After the Copal Dye-Sub interface has been properly configured, the next step to choose the products you wish to print.
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization** Pane, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the Primary Navigation Pane will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Copal Dye-Sub interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one Product Matrix option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the Copal Dye-Sub Printer Interface Settings
*Learn how to edit Copal Dye-Sub Printer interface settings in the Setup Wizard, including ribbon size, color correction, and product configuration.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Copal Dye-Sub Printer**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter "Copal", or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Copal Dye Sub Printer** option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Copal Dye-Sub Printer Options:**
- **Debug Mode:** The default setting is false. This should only be set to true for troubleshooting.
- **Time Out Seconds:** The default setting is 120 seconds. This value should not be changed.
- **Printer ID:** The ID as shown on the LED display of the printer itself.
- **Color Ribbon Size:** Use the drop-down menu to select the ribbon size that is loaded in the printer.
- **Print Smaller Prints: If the \*Color Ribbon Size** option is setup for 6x9, and you want to use this printer to also print 4x6s, set this option to **True**. This is not as fast as 4x6s using the windows driver, but it will work. It will also cost more per print as well.
- **Use Color Correction:** To manually apply color correction to all prints, set to **True**. (Default is **False**).Change the **Sharpness, Brightness, Contrast, Saturation, Red Balance, Green Balance, and Blue Balance** as desired.
If more than one printer is connected, repeat the above steps, for Printer Settings 2 but change the **Printer ID** on the printer and in the Setup Wizard, so it is a different ID from the other printer.
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
| |
|:---------------------------------------|
|  |
| Copal Dye-Sub Printer General Settings |
---
## Copal Dye-Sub Printer
The Copal Dye-Sub Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to print orders generated from an APM to one or more Copal printers directly attached to the machine. This interface enables special Copal capabilities that are not in the Windows driver.
\*\***Note:** If the Copal is only printing a single size, then it is best to load the Windows driver and use the Windows printer interface instead of this one.
### Prerequisites
1. The Windows driver for the Copal printer needs to be properly installed and configured to print the correct size on the APM or Lab 50 machine.
2. The Copal Printer needs to have the latest firmware installed.
3. If more than one printer is installed, then each printer needs to have a unique ID. (This is the number found on the LED display on the front of the printer).
4. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up Copal Dye-Sub Printer Using Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the Copal Dye Sub Printer Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Black Patch Installation on EQ-9800
If you are experiencing color patching on products printed with an all-black background, you will need to install a patch provided by OKI-data in addition to making configuration changes at the printer. The patch may be downloaded from the following link:
[http://www.lucidiom.com/support/Patchy.zip](http://www.lucidiom.com/support/Patchy.zip)
You will need to right-click on the file and extract the contents. Once the files are extracted, you'll need to double-click on **ct.exe** and follow the directions for making changes to apply the patch. This includes changing the **Queue Name** of the LPR Settings (**Printer Properties > Ports Tab > Configure Port**) and also making sure to leave the printer sitting in the "Ready to Print" mode before restarting it once the patch has been applied. Additionally, once the patch has been installed you will need to change the Queue Name back to the original settings.
Once the patch has been installed, you will then need to make adjustments to the media types on the printer itself. You can change the media types by accessing the **Menu options**. You will need to go into **Menu > Menus > Tray Configuration > Tray 2 Configuration > Media Type** and change the media type to *"Usertype 2"*. This setting will need to be applied for Trays 2, 3, 5, and the MP Tray.
\*\***Note:** Trays 1 and 4 should not be changed from their Glossy designation.
Once you have made these changes, please print out Configuration Pages (**Menu > Print Pages > Configuration**) on regular copy paper to confirm that your changes have been saved.
Lastly, it might be necessary to open the Setup Wizard and assign the media type for each product you print to *“Usertype 2”* as well.
1. In Lab 50, access **Settings > Fulfillment > PrintServer >** then click on the APM Setup Wizard button to open the **Setup Wizard** program.
2. Under Printer Configuration, select the EQ printer.
3. On the right panel, click on the **Configure Products** button.
4. Double-click on one of the products printed on one of the trays you made adjustments to, then change **Media Type** to *“Usertype 2”*.
5. Click **OK**.
6. Repeat for each product you offer on trays 2, 3, 5, and the MP tray.
---
## Calibration
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| EFI Densitometer |
The EQ-9800/9850 printer needs to be calibrated immediately on first operation, and every time thereafter when a consumable is replaced. It is also recommended to recalibrate every month. This operation upholds the quality of items printed, and ensures consistent color throughout the printer’s lifespan. Once you have become familiar with the process for calibrating your printer, it will only take a few minutes each time. The importance of regular calibrations, at both periodic and consumable-replacement intervals, cannot be over-stressed.
**Supported Densitometers:**
- X-Rite DTP32
- X-Rite DTP 41
- EFI Spectrometer ES-1000
- EFI Densitometer ED-100
- Or any model equivalent to the Eye 1 Pro by X-Rite
Calibration is done through the use of a densitometer and the Fiery Command Workstation and/or the Colorwise tools software. While the calibrations steps for each densitometer will vary, included below are the standard steps to calibrate the printer using the X-Rite i1 Photo LT densitometer sold by Lucidiom.
**To perform a calibration using the X-Rite i1 Photo LT densitometer:**
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Colorwise Pro Tools WIndow |
|  |
| Calibration Window |
1. Begin by confirming that you have **plain, 20lb letter-size paper in tray one of the printer. This should not be glossy paper.** The unit is hard coded to print this page on plain media, and the use of glossy paper for the calibration page may cause print quality issues.
2. Click **START** > **ALL PROGRAMS** > **FIERY** > **COMMAND WORKSTATION 4**
3. Choose **Log in/Log out** from the Server menu. CWS4 will start searching for Fiery servers. Choose the
device that matches the correct IP Address.
4. Click the **Login** button next to the Fiery name to establish the connection.
5. Select the **Administrator** option and then click **Log In.**
6. Choose **Manage Color** from the Server Menu.
7. Click on **Calibrator.**
8. For **Select Method**, choose **ES-1000 Spectrometer** from the drop-down menu.
9. For the **Screen Setting**, choose **12x6 Dot Screen** from the drop-down menu.
10. Click **Print**.
11. On the **Print Options Menu**, keep the defaults and click **Print**. A page with 21 swatches will print to the printer.
12. Place the printed page on a stack of 5 sheets of blank paper to prevent bleed through (from the surface you are working on) while conducting the calibration process.
13. Align the plastic guide strip up so that the center passes through the first column of swatches (Cyan).
14. Click **Measure**.
15. Confirm that you are doing 21 patches and click **Measure**.
16. A window opens that request *“Please place the ES-1000 in its calibration cradle and click Ok.”* Click **Ok**.
17. Measure the cyan swatches by starting the ES-1000 in the grey bracket atop the swatches.
18. Click the button on the device and wait for an audible beep. If you cannot hear the beep, then wait 1-2 seconds, before dragging the device down the page.
19. While holding the button drag the device smoothly down the plastic guide until you have passed the last swatch, then release the button. To judge the correct speed, from start to finish, use a count of 4.
20. When the scan has been successful, a check will appear and the red cross will move to the next color.
21. When all four colors have been scanned, click the **Accept** button.
22. Click **Ok**.
23. Click **Apply**.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Calibration Sheet |
---
## Configuration, Demo, and PS Test Pages
In certain instances, you may be required to print pages from the printer for diagnostic and support purposes. These
pages give vital information about the printer status, setup, and color quality.
**These should be printed on plain, 20lb letter-size paper (not glossy paper).** The unit is hard coded to print these
information pages on plain media. To print, simply replace the paper in Tray 1 with plain paper, and switch back
when finished.
\***If these pages are printed on glossy media, you may have fusing issues which can cause toner to adhere to and dirty the fuser, causing print quality issues.**
| | |
|:-------------------------------|:-------------------------------|
|  |  |
| EQ Front Panel | LCD screen |
Press ENTER to switch to the menu mode.
1. Load plain paper into Tray 1, as described above.
2. Use the down key to scroll down to the **Print Pages** function.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Use the down/up and ENTER keys to select either the **Configuration**, **Demo**, or **PS Test Page** options
5. Press ENTER.
6. The page you selected will be printed.
---
## Consumable Items
*Learn about EQ-9800/9850 consumable items, including toner, imaging drum, transfer belt, fuser unit, and expected replacement yields.*
The EQ-9800/9850 uses a set series of components that are considered consumables. These items need to be replaced over time through regular usage.
\*\***Note:** Expected yields are calculated using industry standards, such as 5% coverage and 3-pages per job. Creative photographic products generally require substantially more toner per page.
These parts and their expected output yields are:
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Toner in Printer |
- Toner
- Approximately 15,000 pages.
- Imaging Drum
- Approximately 30,000 pages.
- Transfer Belt
- Approximately 100,000 pages.
- Fuser Unit
- Approximately 100,000 pages.
- Toner Waste Bottle
- Approximately 30,000 pages
\*\***Note:** There are a number of variables that will affect these output numbers, including the size of any given print job.
Only consumable items purchased directly from Lucidiom should be used in the printer. It is not recommended to re-use existing consumables, refill toner cartridges, or use items that are not designed specifically for the printer model in use and doing so **may void the warranty** on your printer.
Given the nature of consumable products, they should not be stocked. Their shelf life is short and can deteriorate if stored in less than ideal conditions, such as high humidity environments. If consumables must be stocked, one year is the longest shelf life in ideal conditions.
---
## Drum Cleaning
*Learn how to enable Drum Cleaning on your printer to fix banding issues and extend drum life when substrate levels drop low.*
After a period of use, it may become necessary to turn on a function called **Drum Cleaning**. This will perform a cleaning of the substrate on all of the drums in the printer when printing a job.
Good indicators for using Drum Cleaning are the following:
- Banding on the output
- When the Configuration Page shows ~60%-40% life left on average between all four drums (will vary greatly based on usage and coverage)
- As directed by the support team
Here are the steps to enable it:
- Press the **MENU** button on the Printer
- Using the LED screen on the printer, scroll down to ***Menus***, press **ENTER**
- Select ***System Adjust***, press **Enter**
- Scroll down (way down) until you see ***Drum Cleaning***, press **ENTER**
- Select ***On***, press **ENTER**
- Use the **BACK** button to get back to the Online/Ready to print screen.
Make sure to run at least several significant size jobs through the printer after changing this setting. Example: Four or more 20+ page 11x8.5/A4 books is a good benchmark to use.
Once you have let Drum Cleaning run for several significant jobs, please use the same directions above to turn it off again. Leaving Drum Cleaning on for an extended period of time beyond several large jobs will significantly shorten the life of the drum.
---
## EQ-9800 & 9850 Humidity Check
*Learn how to check ambient humidity on EQ-9800/9850 printers to prevent magenta tint or toner flaking and maintain quality prints.*
Ambient humidity and temperature can greatly affect the printing process on the EQ-9800/9850 series printers. We recommend occasionally checking the humidity levels to ensure quality output. Why is this important?
Ideal humidity should be in the ballpark range of about **50%-70%**. If the ambient humidity dips below 30%, which can sometimes happen in the cold winter months when the air is drier, then you may see a faint magenta cast on prints. This can be corrected by placing a humidifier next to the printer to get more moisture in the air or through other alternative means.
Conversely, if the humidity is too high, above 90%, then the toner will not lay down properly on the page, and it may flake off. This can be corrected through the use of a dehumidifier near the printer.
Checking this on an occasional basis can be a very beneficial part of maintaining a quality print output from the printer.
To check the humidity on the EQ-9800/9850, all you need to do is the following:
1. Power down the printer if it is on already, or restart it if it is off.
2. When powering up or restarting, press the **UP**, **DOWN** and **HELP** buttons simultaneously while it boots.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
1. Once it boots up into the **Maintenance Menu**, scroll down to the option called **Diagnostic Mode**.
2. Press **Enter** to select it.
3. Press the **BACK**, **UP**, **DOWN**, and **ENTER** keys simultaneously. You will then see a screen that says initializing.
4. Press up once or twice and you will then see **ENV**. at the top.
5. On this screen, you will then see the humidity measured by percentage on the 2nd line.
6. To get out of this menu, shut down the machine by using the power switch. *\*\***Note:** This is the only time where it is safe to power the printer down by using the switch. Otherwise, it is better to press the "Shut Down/Restart" button on the front during normal operation.*
7. Once the machine has restarted, make any necessary adjustments to bring the humidity within the suggested levels.
---
## EQ-9800 & 9850 Supported Densitometers
*View supported densitometers for calibrating EQ-9800 and 9850 printers, including X-Rite and EFI models, using Fiery Command Workstation tools.*
The following is a list of supported densitometers for calibrating the EQ-9800 and 9850 series printers:
- X-Rite DTP 32
- EFI Spectrometer ES-1000
- X-Rite DTP 41
- EFI Densitometer ED-100
To calibrate the printer, you will use the Fiery Command Workstation and/or the Colorwise tools to bring the Calibration tool up, select your densitometer, and then calibrate. The methods and steps will be slightly different from densitometer to densitometer.
---
## EQ-9850 Hard Drive Upgrade & Replacement Instructions
*Learn how to safely remove and replace the hard drive on an EQ-9800/9850 printer with this step-by-step Lucidiom guide.*
The directions below detail removal and replacement of the hard drive for an EQ-9800 and/or 9850 printer. This should only be done as directed by Lucidiom Technical Support.
**Note:** Please keep all materials, including the box and padding, as this will be used to return the original hard drive using the provided shipping label.
### PART 1: PRINT CONFIGURATION SHEET
Before the replacement takes place, you will need to print out a copy of the current printer configuration for reference in configuring the new hard drive.
To accomplish this, please do the following:
1. Place plain, 20lb letter-size copy paper in Tray 1, temporarily replacing the 7x10 Folded Card paper. The letter-sized paper will need to placed in portrait orientation (long edge feed). Be sure to set the guides to the edge of the paper.
2. Press Enter on the front panel of the printer.
3. Press the q key until Print Pages is highlighted, and press Enter.
4. Press the q key until Configuration is highlighted, and press Enter.
5. This will print 3-4 configuration sheets. Please write Original Settings on each page and place them aside, as we’ll be referencing them later on for the new hard drive.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
### PART 2: HARD DRIVE REPLACEMENT
**STEP 1:**
To begin, please shut down the printer. You can do so by holding down the SHUT DOWN/RESTART button until the following message appears on the front panel:
**Turn off power or press RESTART button**
Once you see this message, flip the black switch on the left-hand side of the printer to completely shutdown the machine
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
**STEP 2:**
Locate the maintenance panel on the back of the printer, indicated by two thumbscrews.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
Unscrew both thumbscrews, keeping in mind that they do not unscrew completely and are left attached to the door. Once unscrewed, swing the panel door out to reveal the system mainboard.
**STEP 3:**
Identify the hard drive. It is a small, black box on the top, right-hand side above the fan. There is a flap on the front of the drive. Carefully raise the flap about halfway until the drive unlocks from the main board.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
Once unlocked, the drive will be loose. Carefully lift it out of the machine and put it aside.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
**STEP 4:**
Open the box containing the replacement drive. The box should contain a pre-paid return shipping label, along with shipping instructions, and the new hard drive.
**Once the replacement is complete, please place the old hard drive in the box, and follow the enclosed instructions.**
On the new hard drive, raise the flap and put it aside. Notice the 4 slots on the main board. The new drive will need to be aligned with these slots, and then carefully placed into them.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
The green circuit board side of the hard drive should be facing the inside of the printer, and the drive connector should be facing down.
Once the drive has been carefully placed into the slots, gently press down on the front flap until it locks into place.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
**STEP 5:**
Close the door, reattach the thumbscrews, and flip the black switch on the left-hand side of the printer to power it back on.
### PART 3: PRINTER RECONFIGURATION
Now that the hard drive has been replaced, we will need to reconfigure some of the printer settings.
First, please print another set of configuration pages, as highlighted in Part 1, and write Post Upgrade on each page. Once these new configuration sheets are printed, put them aside. These new sheets will only need to be referred to by Lucidiom Technical Support in case there is a problem.
From this point on, we will be referring to the original set of configuration pages that you printed, marked as Original Settings.
**STEP 1: Reassigning IP Address**
Referring to the printed configuration sheets marked **Original Settings**, locate the area labeled **Network Setup**. Look for the section beginning with “IPv4 Setup”. We will be referring to the values as entered in this area.
1. Confirm that the printer displays **(Ready to Print)**.
2. Press q key until **(Admin Setup)** appears. Press Enter.
3. **Continue to Setup?** displays. Press Enter to select **Yes**. The printer goes offline and **Running Setup** displays. This will take about a minute.
4. The Setup Menu displays, press q to select **(Network Setup)**. Press Enter.
5. Press q to select **(Protocol Setup)**. Press Enter.
6. Press q to select **(IPv4 Setup)**. Press Enter.
7. Press q to select **(Ethernet Setup)**. Press Enter.
8. **Enable AutoIP Config?** displays. Select **No**. Press Enter.
9. On your configuration sheet, refer to the line marked “IP Address”.
10. Enter the IP Address as marked on your Original Settings configuration sheet. Use ?/q to change each octet (groups of 3 numbers). Press Enter to proceed to the next octet. Once the address has been input, press Enter.
11. **(Subnet Mask)** displays. Repeat instructions in steps 9 and 10, but using the “Subnet Mask” line as marked on your **Original Settings** configuration sheet instead.
12. **(IPv4 Successfully Bound to Ethernet)** displays. Press Enter.
13. **(Gateway Address)** displays. Repeat instructions in steps 9 and 10, but using the “Gateway Address” line as marked on your **Original Settings** configuration sheet instead.
14. Press Enter to exit **TCP/IP Setup, Protocol Setup, and Network Setup**.
**STEP 2: Disable Media Check**
Once you have configured the IP Address, as referenced above, then you will be returned to the **Admin Setup** menu. From here:
1. Press q to select **(Printer Setup)**. Press Enter.
2. Continue to press Enter until you come to **(Media Check)**.
3. Press q to select **Off**. Press Enter.
4. Continue to press Enter > until you see **(Save Changes?)**. Select **Yes** and press Enter.
5. Press Enter to Exit the Setup Menu.
6. The printer will restart the server and initialize as normal. **(Ready to Print)** displays.
**STEP 3: Tray Reconfiguration**
Next, we will need to reconfigure some of the individual tray settings. To do this:
1. Confirm that the printer displays **(Ready to Print)**.
2. Press q key until **(Menus)** appears. Press Enter.
3. **(Tray Configuration)** should be highlighted. Press Enter.
4. Press q key until **(Auto Tray Switch)** is selected. Press Enter.
5. Select **Off** and press Enter.
6. Press q key until **(Tray 1 Config)** is selected. Press Enter.
7. Press q key until **(Media Type)** is selected. Press Enter.
8. Press q key until **(Glossy)** is selected. Press Enter.
9. Press the Back button to return to the Tray Configuration menu.
10. Repeat steps 6 – 9 for Trays 2, 3, 4, 5, and the MPTray, setting the Media Type to Glossy for each.
11. Once finished, press the Back button to return to the main screen where **(Ready to Print)** displays.
**STEP 4: Color Profile Setup**
This final step involves re-establishing the use of the preferred default color profile for the printer.
1. Open Command Workstation on your machine, (Ex. Start Menu->Fiery->Command Workstation).
2. When Command Workstation opens, click on the **Administrator** key, leave the password blank, and click on the **Log In** button.
3. At the top of the Command Workstation screen, select **Server** and then **Manage Color**.
4. Click on the **Profile Manager** button and a new window will appear.
5. At the top right of this window, double-click on the sRGB profile.
6. In the new window that appears, set it to default and then click **Apply** and **Save**.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
### PART 4: RETURN ORIGINAL HARD DRIVE
The original hard drive needs to be returned shortly upon receipt and installation of the new drive using the return shipping label, box, and padding that the replacement drive came in. Attached to this email is a set of instructions on returning the hard drive with the provided label using the box that the replacement hard drive was shipped in for installation.
- **Pack the original hard drive into the box.**
- **Use the instruction sheet and return shipping label to organize a pick up for the drive.**
- **For the RMA/RA Number use #60492967 on the return shipping label. This is a very important step.**
---
## Recommended product print settings for Holiday 4x8 and 5x7 double-side products using the EQ-9850
*Learn recommended EQ-9850 print settings for Holiday 4x8 and 5x7 double-sided products, including full-bleed printing and paper-cutting tips.*
Lucidiom's 2010 Holiday Pack features several new products, including double-sided 5x7 and 7x5 cards. The attached screenshots indicate the recommended product print settings as provided by the content team. While Lucidiom does not sell paper in these sizes, it is very easy to cut down existing paper types in your store, such as 5x7 folded cards, to create the necessary sizes for processing.
If you do not have a paper cutter in your store, you can purchase a guillotine paper cutter direct from your regional sales representative.
The configuration settings below will allow the products to print with the standard white edge around the product, if you'd prefer to print full-bleed (on paper that is 1 inch longer on each edge), use the same settings, but check the box for full-bleed printing and then trim the products after printing to produce the edge-to-edge print :
| | |
|:-----------------------------------------|:-----------------------------------------|
|  |  |
| 4x8 Double-Sided Card (Product ID 6029) | 8x4 Double-Sided Card (Product ID 6032) |
|  |  |
| 5x5 Flat Card (Product ID 6034) | 5x5 Double-Sided Card (Product ID 6033) |
|  |  |
| 5x7 Double-Sided Card (Product ID 6030) | 7x5 Double-Sided Card (Product ID 6031) |
---
## EQ-9800 and EQ-9850 Printers
*Learn about Lucidiom's EQ-9800 and EQ-9850 laser printers, covering setup, tray configuration, calibration, consumables, and Photo Folio product printing.*
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| EQ-9800/9850 |
### Printer Overview
The EQ-9800 and EQ-9850 are laser printers sold by Lucidiom. They can produce exceptional 1200x1200 DPI duplexed pages up to 12x18 inches in the standard paper trays or up to 12.9x47.24 inches in the multipurpose tray. Retailers can calibrate the printer just like they do with regular photo printers via the EFI Fiery© RIP software, to deliver consistent, quality color every time.
The EQ-9800/9850 is the ideal solution for producing a wide range of documents on a variety of paper weights and sizes. Single Pass Color™ technology and the straight-through paper path allow for faster print speeds, minimal paper jams, and smooth handling.
Productivity features like Auto Media Detect automatically adjust the printer to your required media type, and Auto Color Balance ensures that output remains consistent from start to finish. Also included is Job Accounting software that allows tracking of printed pages, the types and quantities of paper used, and a record of printing activity.
Both printers are used in conjunction with the APM software to print the Photo Folio products offered as part of the EQ Pro package. The core products in Photo Folio are:
- Banners
- Envelopes
- Folded Cards
- Multi-Page Calendars
- Notepads
- Photo Books
- Posters & Collages
- Scrapbook Pages
**The following are generally included with purchase (please check your purchase order to confirm):**
- 5 paper trays, including a Multipurpose manual feed tray.
- Duplex unit (for auto, double-sided printing of pages up to 240gsm weight).
- On-site installation.
- 1 year on-site warranty.
Also included is a 5-year limited warranty for the LED heads, and a 90-day warranty for each consumable part that is replaced. Toner spillage, abuse to printer and parts, and broken equipment/drums due to improper installation are not covered under warranty.
Please contact your Lucidiom sales representative for further information regarding the purchase of this product.
### In This Section
Common terms used throughout this guide, like paper feed, binding, and scoring.
How the Photo Folio product line maps to printer capabilities.
Set up paper trays for the products you print.
Toner, drums, and other replaceable parts.
Calibrate the printer for consistent color output.
Print built-in test pages to verify setup.
Install the black patch option on the EQ-9800.
Default tray size settings in imperial units.
Default tray size settings in metric units.
Check humidity conditions affecting print quality.
Clean the drum to maintain print quality.
Densitometers supported for calibration.
Instructions for upgrading or replacing the EQ-9850 hard drive.
Recommended settings for 4x8 and 5x7 double-sided holiday products.
Set up the sRGB source profile on the EQ-9800 & 9850.
---
## Photo Folio Product Differentiation
The APM software can be configured to produce a number of different Photo Folio products that print to the EQ-9800/9850. The different product types come in multiple sizes, but there are five main categories of products:
**Hard Cover Books:**
- Printed one layout to a page, and are available in 20 and 40 page varieties. Customers also have the option to add additional pages, up to a max of 50, depending on the product.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Photo Folio Books |
- Pages are stacked and glued into the cover using the Unibind photo book binder.
- Available in the software in the following sizes: 12x12, 8½x11, 11x8½, 8x8, 7x5, 6x8, 6x6, 6x4, A4 (landscape), A4 (portrait), A5 (landscape), A5 (portrait).
- Covers that the customer may choose from in the software include: black linen, black leather, brown leather, red linen, blue linen, white linen. The selection will vary by product type.
- The actual paper size for hard cover books is the same as the finished product size. i.e. 8½x11 books use paper that is 8½x11 inches.
**Flip Books:**
- Use pre-scored paper, and are available with 20 pages.
- Pages are arranged in the software so that two book pages are printed per sheet of paper, so when it is folded in half, the pages are in order.
- Available in the software in the following finished sizes: 8½x11, 6x6, 4x4.
- Actual paper width is double the finished size, as it is folded to make the final product.
- The cover of the book is the first page; the entire book is made of the same paper.
- The "binding" this type of book uses is called "saddle stitching", which requires a special stapler that is deep enough to reach the middle crease of the page.
**Calendars:**
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Photo Folio Products |
- Available in the software in the following sizes: 12x12, 12x18, 11x8½, A4 (landscape), and A5 (landscape).
- Customers can enter custom text to personalize the days of the week with birthdays and anniversaries.
- All sizes print out with pictures on one page, and the calendar portion on another with the exception of 12x18, which prints everything on one page. 12x18 calendars are printed so that they must be turned over on the long edge when the page is flipped to correctly display the months in sequence.
**Folded Cards:**
- Available in horizontal (7x5) and vertical (5x7) formats.
- Use pre-scored, 10x7 paper.
- Available in a variety of categories and themes to fit any occasion.
**Other Photo Folio Products:**
- Banners (10x30, 12x36, 30x10, 36x12)
- Envelopes (5.25x7.25)
- Notecards (3x5)
- Notepads (6x9)
- Posters and Collages (11x14, 12x18)
- Scrapbook Pages (5x5, 6x6, 8x8, 10x10, 12x12)
---
## Printer Terminology
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Long Edge Feed |
|  |
| Short Edge Feed |
When referring to the EQ-9800/9850 later in this chapter, there are certain common terms that need to be defined for a full understanding of printer operation. These terms include:
- **Duplex:** Two- sided printing. Both the EQ-9800 and EQ-9850 come with a duplex unit installed standard.
- **Paper Feed:** This refers to the edge of the paper that is being fed into the printer first. From a front, top-down perspective view of the tray, the paper is fed into the printer through the right-hand side of the printer. The paper may be fed long edge or short edge first.
\*\***For paper that is not a 1:1 ratio, long edge feed should be the default setting. This excludes Folded Cards and 12x18 products.**
- **Long Edge Feed:** The longest edge of the paper is fed into the printer first. For example, with 8.5x11 or A4 paper, the 11 inch side is facing the right-hand side of the printer. This usually refers to a portrait orientation.
- **Short Edge Feed:** The shortest edge of the paper is fed into the printer first. For example, with 10x7 or A5 paper, the 7 inch side is facing the right-hand side of the printer. This usually refers to a landscape orientation.
- **Binding:** The edge, long or short, on which the finished product is
bound. For example, on an 11x8.5 book, the binding is short edge whereas the binding on an 11x8.5 calendar is long edge.
| | |
|:-------------------------------|:-------------------------------|
|  |  |
| Long Edge Binding | Short Edge Binding |
- **Booklet Type:** Refers to multiple images or layouts being printed on a single side. For example, you can print an 8.5x11 book on 11x17 paper, and fold it in half. This setting can either be two-up portrait or two-up landscape, referring to the orientation of the layouts on the page.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Scored Paper |
- **Scoring:** Refers to a pre-made fold/crease in the paper. This paper type is typically used for the folded card and flip book products. Scored products loaded into one of the paper trays should be loaded with the score up, while scored products printed through
the multipurpose tray should be loaded score down.
---
## Setting up sRGB Source Profile on the EQ-9800 & 9850
One way to help improve the overall quality of the EQ-9800/9850 series printers is to use the sRGB profile as the default color input profile.
To change the default color profile, please do the following:
1. Open **Command Workstation** on your machine, (Ex. *Start Menu -> Fiery -> Command Workstation*). Alternatively, if you do not have **Command Workstation** installed, you can launch **Colorwise Pro Tools** from the Fiery menu, and skip to step 4 below.
2. When **Command Workstation** opens, click on the **Administrator** key, leave the password blank, and click on the ***Log In*** button.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
3. At the top of the **Command Workstation** screen, select ***Server*** and then ***Manage Color***.
4. Click on the ***Profile Manager*** Button and a new window will appear.
5. At the top, right of this window, double-click on the sRGB profile.
6. In the new window that appears, click the **Default** checkbox.
7. Click **Apply** and **Save**.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
The printer is now set to use sRGB as the default input profile.
**Note:** After setting this profile, a re-calibration should be done with a densitometer and a calibration sheet printed out on plain paper. When calibrating, make sure that the calibration sheet has several pages underneath it for an accurate reading.
---
## Tray Configuration
The EQ-9800/9850 comes with 5 trays standard, in addition to a side-fed multipurpose tray used to print odd paper sizes, or sizes that are too small to fit into a tray.
Although the printer can be configured in a variety of different ways, these settings are recommended for ease of use with the Lucidiom software, and to save time during configuration.
If you choose to change these settings, please keep in mind that for optimal printer functionality, it is best to keep the largest paper sizes reserved for the bottom trays, moving up from tray to tray with the sequentially smaller sizes. This can prevent unwanted jams and errors in the printer. These tray settings also assume that the printer itself is configured properly with the recommended color profile and media settings. Please contact Technical Support for the latest Answer Book to ensure your printer is configured correctly.
\*\***All 11x8.5, A4, and A5 trays should be set to feed long edge, when possible (this excludes 12x12 and 12x18 sizes and all scored products including 5x7 cards and Flip Books).**
**Recommended Imperial Tray Settings:**
| Tray | Product Type | Paper Size | Paper Type | Paper Feed | Binding |
|:----------------------|:-----------------|:---------------|:---------------|:---------------|:------------|
| **Tray 1** | 5x7 Folded Cards | 10x7 \* | 80lb Cover | Short Edge | Short Edge |
| | 7x5 Folded Cards | | | | |
| **Tray 2** | 11x8.5 Books | Letter | 100lb Text | Long Edge | Short Edge |
| | 8.5x11 Books | | | | Long Edge |
| **Tray 3** | 11x8.5 Calendars | Letter | 10lb Cover | Long Edge | Long Edge |
| **Tray 4** | 12x12 Books | 12x12 \* | 100lb Text | Long Edge | Long Edge |
| | 12x12 Calendars | | | | Short Edge |
| **Tray 5** | 12x18 Calendars | Tabloid Extra | 80lb Cover | Short Edge | Long Edge |
| **Multipurpose Tray** | Any Other Size † | Varies | Varies | Short Edge | Varies |
**Recommended Metric Tray Settings:**
| Tray | Product Type | Paper Size | Paper Type | Paper Feed | Binding |
|:----------------------|:-----------------|:---------------|:---------------|:---------------|:------------|
| **Tray 1** | 5x7 Folded Cards | 10x7 \* | 80lb Cover | Short Edge | Short Edge |
| **Tray 2** | A5 Hard Books | A5 | 100lb Text | Short Edge | Short Edge |
| **Tray 3** | A4 Hard Books | A4 | 80lb Cover | Long Edge | Long Edge |
| **Tray 4** | 12x12 Books | 12x12 \* | 100lb Text | Long Edge | Long Edge |
| **Tray 5** | 12x18 Calendars | Tabloid Extra | 80lb Cover | Short Edge | Long Edge |
| **Multipurpose Tray** | Any Other Size † | Varies | Varies | Short Edge | Varies |
'\*' Must be configured as "PostScript Custom Page Size" in driver and software.
'†' Includes 6x6 Books, 8x8 Books, Envelopes, Banners, etc.
---
## Default 9800 & 9850 Tray Designations - Imperial Size Settings
*Learn the default imperial tray, paper size, and feed settings for Lucidiom 9800 and 9850 series printers to configure jobs correctly.*
The default tray configurations for a Lucidiom 9800/9850 series printer are the following:
### Recommended Imperial Tray Settings:
| Tray | Product Type | Paper Size | Paper Type | Paper Feed | Binding |
|:------------------|:-----------------|:---------------|:---------------|:---------------|:------------|
| Tray 1 | 5x7 Folded Cards | 10x7\* | 80lb Cover | Short Edge | Short Edge |
| | 7x5 Folded Cards | 10x7\* | 80lb Cover | Short Edge | Short Edge |
| Tray 2 | 11x8.5 Books | Letter | 100lb Text | Long Edge | Short Edge |
| | 8.5x11 Books | Letter | 100lb Text | Long Edge | Long Edge |
| Tray 3 | 11x8.5 Calendars | Letter | 80lb Cover | Long Edge | Long Edge |
| Tray 4 | 12x12 Books | 12x12\* | 100lb Text | Long Edge | Long Edge |
| | 12x12 Calendars | 12x12\* | 100lb Text | Long Edge | Short Edge |
| Tray 5 | 12x18 Calendars | Tabloid Extra | 80lb Cover | Short Edge | Long Edge |
| Multipurpose Tray | Any Other Size † | Varies | Varies | Short Edge | Varies |
"\*" Must be configured as “PostScript Custom Page Size” in driver and software.
"†" Includes 6x6 Books, 8x8 Books, Envelopes, Banners, etc.
---
## Default 9800 & 9850 Tray Designations - Metric Size Settings
*Default metric tray settings for Lucidiom 9800/9850 printers, covering paper size, type, feed, and binding for each tray configuration.*
The default tray configurations for a Lucidiom 9800/9850 series printer are the following:
### Recommended Metric Tray Settings:
| Tray | Product Type | Paper Size | Paper Type | Paper Feed | Binding |
|:------------------|:-----------------|:---------------|:---------------|:---------------|:------------|
| Tray 1 | 5x7 Folded Cards | 10x7\* | 80lb Cover | Short Edge | Short Edge |
| Tray 2 | A5 Hard Books | A5 | 100lb Text | Short Edge | Short Edge |
| Tray 3 | A4 Hard Books | A4 | 80lb Cover | Long Edge | Long Edge |
| Tray 4 | 12x12 Books | 12x12\* | 100lb Text | Long Edge | Long Edge |
| Tray 5 | 12x18 Calendars | Tabloid Extra | 80lb Cover | Short Edge | Long Edge |
| Multipurpose Tray | Any Other Size † | Varies | Varies | Short Edge | Varies |
"\*" Must be configured as “PostScript Custom Page Size” in driver and software.
"†" Includes 6x6 Books, 8x8 Books, Envelopes, Banners, etc.
---
## Assigning Products to the Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6 Interface
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
After the Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6 interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the 8Primary Navigation Pane\* will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6 interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the PIC 2.6 Interface Settings
*Configure Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6 interface settings in the Setup Wizard, including file locations, printer options, and order number formatting.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard button**, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select the **Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6**.
4. In the **Printer Name field**, enter "PIC", or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6** option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6 Options:**
- **Order File Location Dest:** Enter the location of the ADPCPrints folder on the PIC using the UNC naming convention.
\*\***Note:** If the PIC machine is called "PIC390", then the setting should be changed from C:\FujiPrints\OrderFiles to \\PIC390\ADPCPrints\. Most machines use \\PIC\ADPCPrints.
- **Order File Location Temp:** The UNC path of the temporary drop folder on the local machine printing the order.
\*\***Note:** If the APM or Lab 50 machine is called "LAB", then these settings should be changed from C:\APM-XXXX\Frontier\FrontierTemp\to \\LAB\Frontier\FrontierTemp.
- **Image File Location:** The UNC path of the image storage folder on the local machine printing the order.
\*\***Note:** If the APM or Lab 50 machine is called "LAB", then these settings should be changed from C:\APM-XXXX\Frontier\Images\to \\LAB\Frontier\Images.
- **Wait for Printer Completion:** If enabled, will pause all APM or Lab 50 printing until the current order has been processed. Recommended setting is False.
- **Printer Timeout:** The amount of time to wait for an order to finish printing before displaying an error communicating with the PIC. This value is set to 0 by default and should not be changed.
- **Rush:** Should be set to 0, unless all APM and/or Lab 50 orders take precedence over other jobs. If so, then change the setting to 1.
- **Source:** Creates a tag in the order file that reports to the PIC where the order originated. This may be changed to any value.
- **Negative Number Prepend:** If additional information is needed for all orders coming through from the APM and/or Lab 50 software, enter the information here. Otherwise, it is recommended to keep this field blank.
- **Purge Days:** Enter the number of days that the images should reside in the image file location folder. If this value is set to 0, the images will remain indefinitely. Any images that are older than the given number of days will be erased upon boot up.
- **Order Number Digits:** Used to determine the number of digits displayed on the PIC screen from orders that are sent from APM kiosks or Lab 50. Recommended default is 6.
- **Glossy Surface Code:** The PIC code to use for prints sent to the glossy surface. This is used in PIC 3.0 software only.
- **Matte Surface Code:** The PIC code to use for prints sent to the matte surface. This is used in PIC 3.0 software only.
- **Use original file names for Images:** Set this option to True to use the customer’s file names for the images transferring to the PIC.
- **Append Surface to Customers Name:** Tacks on a "(G)" or "(M)" suffix to the customer name so that when it shows up in the PIC, it will give the PIC operator an indication on whether to use glossy or matte paper finish. Default setting is False.
- **CD Product Code:** The PIC Product code to use for processing Image CDs at the printer. The default value is CD.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Fuji PIC General Settings |
---
## Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6
The Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6 interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format a Fuji machine running PIC 2.6 can accept and print. This interface also works with version 3.0 of the PIC software.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the PIC machine across the local area network, and vice versa.
\*\***Note:** If a firewall is enabled on one or more of the machines, it may need to be reconfigured to let each machine modify and write files to the other.
2. The Fuji Machine must have the ability to pull files from the APM and/or Lab 50 machine(s).
3. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine should be able to access the shared ADPCPrints folder on the PIC machine. Example: \\PIC\ADPCPrints.
\*\***Note:** This may require creating a new user account to match the account on the PIC machine.
4. A folder on the APM or Lab 50 machine (whichever is converting the order) must be created and shared, so that the PIC can access and change the files. Example: The folder C:\Frontier is created on the APM and shared, so it appears across the network to other computers as \\APM-XXXX\Frontier. For Lab 50, this folder must be manually created and shared with full permission for the Frontier user.
5. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up the Fuji PIC 2.6 Interface Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6 Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the Fuji PIC 2.6 Interface
| |
|:-------------------------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Product Rendering within the Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6 Interface |
Each product size available in the APM and/or Lab 50 software will need to be configured to match with the appropriate paper sizes that are setup in the PIC software. Each product has its own internal APM Product ID.
**Configuring Products:**
1. Select the **Canvas** line to highlight it (the area around **Canvas** will turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side.
3. This will launch the Product Rendering Settings window. There are options to **Add**, **Edit**, or **Delete** each product.
**Adding/Editing Products:**
1. Click the **Add** button, or select an existing product and click the **Edit** button.
2. Select the product from the **Name** pull down menu.
3. Enter the **Width** and **Height** in inches. Ex. 8x12, Width=8.00 and Height=12.00
4. Enter the DPI in the field labeled **DPI**. The default value is 300.
5. If Image Intelligence is used on the PIC, Select Y in the **Optimize** field.
6. Set the **Retouch** and **Orient** Fields to 0.
7. In the **Code** field, enter the Fuji Frontier PIC 2.6 code that will be used to print this product.
8. Enter **C** in the Color field.
9. Set the **Crop** field to **True**.
10. Leave the **Crop** code blank.
11. If a separate code is used for borders, enter the code in the **Borders Code** field. If this field is left blank, the software will use the information in the Code field.
12. Click **OK** to save the settings for that product.
13. Repeat for each product needed.
| |
|:--------------------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Adding a Product and Rendering within PIC 2.6 Interface |
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the product to delete and highlight it.
2. Click on **Delete**.
3. Repeat for each product.
4. Click **OK** when finished.
---
## Assigning Products to the Fuji C8 & PrintPix NC-1000 Interface
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
After the Fuji C8/PrintPix NC-1000 interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the \*Primary Navigation
Pane\* will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Fuji C8/PrintPix NC-1000 interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the Fuji C8 Interface Settings
*Learn how to edit the Fuji C8 interface settings, including hot folder, device name, and resizing options in the Setup Wizard.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Fuji C8 / PrintPix NC1000**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“Fuji C8”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Fuji C8 / PrintPix NC 1000** option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**C8 Settings Options:**
- **Hot Folder:** Change the path to the C8Spool folder on the machine with the C8 software installed. The default value is \\FRONTEND\C8spool\.
- **Printing Mode:** In this field, select **Fuji C8** if it is not chosen already.
- **Device Name:** Enter the unique name of the C8 machine in the field (Default is **SP1SRGB**).
- **ID:** Enter the same name as entered in the Hot Folder section (Default is APM).
- **Resizing Method:** Select how you would like the printer to crop the images. The choices are **FILLIN**, **FITIN**, or **NONE**. The default is **FILLIN**.
- Leave the **Wait for print**, **Indicate success on timeout** and **Timeout Seconds** as is unless otherwise instructed for troubleshooting purposes.
**PrintPix NC-1000 Settings Options:**
- **Hot Folder:** This should be setup to match the settings in the FujiFilm Printpix NC-1000 application. The default path is C:\APM\_Folders\Fuji\_NC1000\_Hotfolder\.
- **Printing Mode:** In the field, select **Fuji NC-1000** if it is not chosen already.
- **Device Name:** Enter **NC-1000** in the Device Name field (Default is **SP1SRGB**).
- **ID:** Enter the same name as entered in the Hot Folder section (Default is APM).
- **Resizing Method:** Select how you would like the printer to crop the images. The choices are **FILLIN**, **FITIN**, or **NONE**. The default is **FILLIN**.
- **Leave the \*Wait for print**, **Indicate success on timeout** and **Timeout Seconds** as is unless otherwise instructed for troubleshooting purposes.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Fuji C8/PrintPix NC-1000 General Settings |
---
## Fuji Frontier C8 & PrintPix NC-1000
The Fuji C8/NC-1000 interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format a Fuji Frontier/ PrintPix NC-1000 machine can accept and print. The machine must be running in C8 mode to accept Fuji C8 orders.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 must be able to see the Fuji Frontier across the local area network and vice versa.
2. **Fuji C8:** The machine running the Fuji C8 software must be properly configured and running. (Please refer to Fuji documentation for setup.)
3. PrintPix NC-1000: The machine must be running the NC-1000 Print Pix Utility and the Windows driver must be loaded onto the system.
4. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up the Fuji C8 & PrintPix NC-1000 Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Fuji C8 Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the Fuji C8 & PrintPix NC-1000 Interface
The print sizes for glossy and matte as setup in the C8/PrintPix NC-1000 software on the Frontier will also need to be setup in the interface within the APM software in order to properly process orders.
1. Select the **Configure Product Channels** line to highlight it (the area around **Configure Product Channels** will turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…” that appears on the right-hand side.
3. A window called **Product Channels** will open which will allow for adding, editing and deleting product channels. As an example, highlight the 4x6 Print (2001) product and click **Edit**.
4. Change the channels as necessary for all four settings including **Glossy/No Border**, **Glossy/Border**, **Matte/ No Border**, and **Matte/Border**. \*\***Note:** The settings are case sensitive and must be typed in exactly as they appear in the C8 software.
5. Click **OK** after all channels are made for that product.
6. Repeat Steps 2-4 for each size as needed.
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
| |
|:-----------------------------------------|
|  |
| Product Channels within the C8 Interface |
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the product to highlight it (the area around the product will turn blue).
2. Click on the **Delete** button that appears on the right-hand side.
3. Click **OK** in the confirmation box, and the product will be deleted.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Product Size Channels |
---
## Assigning Products to the Fuji JobMaker Interface
After the Fuji JobMaker interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane** will
expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select Fuji JobMaker from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the JobMaker Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure Fuji JobMaker printer interface settings, including file locations, purge days, surface codes, and image correction options.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server
4. Press the Setup Wizard button and the **Setup Wizard** will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Fuji JobMaker**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter "PIC", or any name you wish to use.
**Fuji JobMaker Options:**
- **Order File Location Dest:** Enter the location of the **Orders** folder on the Fuji machine using the UNC naming convention. The order file should send to the shared Jobmaker folder on the Fuji machine.
\*\***Note:** If the Fuji machine is called "PIC390", then the setting should be changed from C:\APM-XXXX\JobMaker\Orders to \\PIC390\Jobmaker\.
- **Image File Location:** Enter the location of the **Images** folder on the Fuji machine using the UNC naming convention.The image files should send to the shared Jobmaker folder on the Fuji machine.
\*\***Note:** If the Fuji machine is called "PIC390", then the setting should be changed from C:\APM-XXXX\JobMaker\Images to \\PIC390\Jobmaker\.
- **Purge Days:** Enter the number of days that all order files and images should reside in the folders as defined above. If this is set to 0, the files will remain indefinitely. Otherwise, files from these locations that are older than the given number of days will be erased upon boot up. The recommended default is three days.
- **Glossy Surface Code:** The code for the glossy surface as specific in the JobMaker paperinfo.ini file. Default setting is **G**.
- **Matte Surface Code:** The code for the matte surface as specific in the JobMaker paperinfo.ini file. Default setting is **M**.
- **Automatic Image Correction:** Performs automatic image correction for all photos. These settings are defined in the JobMaker software. Default setting is **True**.
| |
|:--------------------------------|
|  |
| Fuji Jobmaker Printer Interface |
---
## Fuji JobMaker
The Fuji JobMaker interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format that a Fuji machine running the JobMaker software can accept and print.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the Fuji machine across the local area network, and vice versa.
\*\***Note:** If a firewall is enabled on one or more of the machines, it may need to be configured to let each machine modify and write files to the other.
2. The Fuji Machine must have the ability to pull files from the APM and/or Lab 50 machine(s).
3. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine should be able to access the shared Orders and Images folders on the Fuji machine. This may require creating a new user account to match the account on the Fuji machine. \*\*Note: The computer name of the Fuji machine may vary.
4. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up the Fuji JobMaker Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the Fuji JobMaker Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the Fuji JobMaker Interface
Each product size available in the APM and/or Lab 50 software will need to be configured to match up with the appropriate paper sizes that are setup in the Fuji software. Each product has its own internal APM Product ID.
**Configuring Products:**
1. Select the **Product Settings** line to highlight it (the area around **Product Settings** will turn blue).
2. Click the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side.
3. This will launch the Product Renderings window. There are options to either **Add**, **Edit**, or **Delete** each product.
| |
|:-----------------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Product Rendering within the Fuji JobMaker Interface |
**Adding/Editing Products:**
1. Click on the **Add** button, or select an existing product and click the **Edit** button.
2. Select the product from the **Product** drop-down menu.
3. Enter the **Width** and **Height** in inches. Ex. 4x6, Width=6.00 and Height=4.00.
4. Enter the DPI in the field labeled **DPI**. The default value is 300.
5. In the **Code** field, enter the Fuji product code that will be used to print this product.
6. In the Bordered Code field, enter the Fuji product borders code. If this field is left blank, the software will use the information in the **Code** field.
7. Click **OK** to save the settings for that product.
8. Repeat for each product as needed.
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the product you would like to delete by clicking on it to highlight it.
2. Click on the **Delete** button.
3. Repeat for each product you would like to remove.
4. Click **OK** when finished.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Adding/Editing a Product |
---
## Assigning Products to the Hot Folder Interface
After the Generic Hot Folder interface has been configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, check all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation** Pane
will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Hot Folder interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the Hot Folder Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure and edit Hot Folder Interface settings in Lab 50, including path, file naming, rendering, and subfolder options.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. On the kiosk, press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer, for kiosk or web orders:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **APM Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select the **Hotfolder Interface**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“Prn1”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Hotfolder** Interface option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**Generic Hot Folder General Settings:**
- **Hot Folder Path:** The folder in which order images will be placed. By default, this is set to C:\APMHotFolder, but it can also be a UNC type location such as \\StorageServer\APMOrders. As long as the machine can see the folder and write to it, then the Hot Folder path can be anywhere on the network.
- **File Name Template:** Used to specify the desired back print format using the case-sensitive parameters listed below. The default is **%ORDER%*%ITEM%*(%PRODUCT% %FINISH%)%QTY%**.
The following is a list of available case-sensitive parameters that may be used:
- **%ORDER%** - Order Number
- **%PRODUCT%** - Product Name
- **%PROD\_ID%** - Product ID
- **%FINISH%** - Finish option (glossy/matte)
- **%QTY%** - Quantity
- **%ORIG\_FN%** - Original File Name
- **%ITEM%** - Item Index
- **%YEAR%** - Current 4 digit year
- **%MONTH%** - Current 2 digit month
- **%DAY%** - Current 2 digit day
- **%FNAME%** - Customer first name
- **%LNAME%** - Customer last name
- **%PHONE%** - Customer phone number
- **Create Order Subfolder:** When this is set to **True**, each order is placed in its own folder within the Hot Folder location. If it is set to **False**, all of the images will be placed directly into the Hot Folder.
- **Order Subfolder Suffix:** The suffix to add to the order folder name when the **Create Order Subfolder** setting is set to true. This is usually left blank.
- **Copy Order XML File:** Indicates whether to include a copy of the original xml file to the Hot Folder. The default value is false.
- **Duplicate for Quantity:** When this is set to **True**, the software outputs multiple identical images when a customer orders more than one copy of a given print, rather than one image with the **%QTY%** value tacked on to the end of the filename. The default value is false.
- **Render Images:** This setting determines whether or not all the order images are rendered when being sent to the HotFolder. Default is **True**.
- **Rendering DPI:** Enter the desired render DPI in this field. The default is 300. This is only used if **Render Images** is set to **True**.
- **Debug Mode:** If after changing all of the settings the Generic Hot Folder interface does not work, come back to this screen and set this to **True**. The default value is false.
- **Create Type Subfolder:** If this is set to **True**, the software creates subfolders within the output folder for each product that the customer ordered. For example, if the customer orders 1 4x6 and 1 8x10, it creates two subfolders, one for 4x6 product and another for 8x10. The default value is false. Example: "C:\APMHOTFOLDER\1231441233\4x6\" and "C:\APMHOTFOLDER\1231441233\8x10\".
- **Print Non-Image Items:** This setting specifies whether non-print items such as an Image CD should also be output to the hot folder. The default value is false.
- **Product Rendering Configuration:** This is used to define the products that should be sent to the hot folder. See the next section for detailed instructions.
---
## Generic Hot Folder
The Generic Hot Folder interface allows Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from a kiosk or website into a format that can be manually queued in any printer. The Generic Hot Folder interface works for both JPEG and PDF files.
### Prerequisites
1. The Lab 50 machine needs to be able access the Hot Folder drop location (folder), whether it be locally on the machine or across the network.
2. If the Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the kiosk. .
### Setting Up a Hot Folder Using the Setup Wizard
**This process includes:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the Hot Folder Interface
*Learn how to add, edit, or delete products in the Hot Folder interface to control rendering settings for borders and print routing.*
Add any products where you want to control the rendering. Products that render with borders will need to be added. If you do not use the Borders setting for prints or you have a product where you don't need to alter how it's rendered, then you don't need to add those products here, as the Hot Folder location is also used as a catch-all for any product whose print routing is not specifically defined, so those work even if you do not define them in the Setup Wizard.
**Configuring Products:**
1. Select the **Product Rendering Configuration** line to highlight it (the area around **Product Rendering Configuration** turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side.
3. This will launch the Product Rendering Settings window. There are options to **Add**, **Edit**, or **Delete** each product.
**Adding/Editing Products:**
1. To add a product, click on the **Add** button. To edit, select a product and click **Edit**. This will launch the **Product Rendering** window.
2. In the **Product** field, use the drop-down menu to select the product.
3. For **DPI, 300** is generally used.
4. Enter the **Width** and **Height**, as indicated and if needed. These fields will auto-fill when the product is selected.
5. Click **OK** when finished.
**Adding a Missing Product:**
If there is a product you want to add but it's not in the pulldown, you will need to add it manually. To do this...
1. Close the Setup Wizard and Lab 50 software.
2. Add the products to your **apmconfig\_products\_custom.xml** file that is in this folder: C:\Program Files (x86)\Lucidiom Lab 50\Tools\Printserver If that file does not exist, you will need to create it or download this sample one: [apmconfig_products_custom.xml](..\..\..\attachments\.xml). If you already have a file with this name, open it and use that. File opens in Notepad++, a free editor. Add a line for each item that is missing from the pulldown. Use the line in there for product 9001 as an example. Use the same number for the product ID and position ID. These IDs should match the product ID (or fulfillment ID if that is used) that has been assigned to the product you are trying to print.
3. Save and add back to the C:\Program Files (x86)\Lucidiom Lab 50\Tools\Printserver folder on your Lab 50 computer. Once that file is in place the products will be available in the Setup Wizard for configuration. Open the SW (Lab 50 > Settings > Print Server > APM Setup Wizard) and resume setup.
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the size you wish to delete from the **Product Rendering Settings** window.
2. Press the **Delete** button.
Once you have added all the products, proceed to the next step to assign them to this printer.
---
## Assigning Products to the Masterflex Interface
After the Gretag Masterflex interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a check mark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane** will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Gretag MasteFlexD interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the Customization Pane, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the Masterflex-D Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure Masterflex-D interface settings in the Setup Wizard, including hot folder paths, aspect ratio, and back print options.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Gretag MasterflexD**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“Masterflex”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Gretag MasterFlexD** Interface option n the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**MasterFlexD General Settings:**
- **Hot Folder:** Enter the location of the HotfoldersEx directory. (Default is C:\Masterflex\HotfoldersEx, but it should be changed to the actual directory where the images will be saved.)
- **Aspect Ratio Match:** Set this field to the desired ratio. Options are **FillWithCrop** or **FitWithBorder**. Default is **FillWithCrop**.
- **Schema:** Enter the location where the HotfolderEx reference file, *TrxHotFolderOrderSchema.xml*, is located on the Masterflex.
- **Inspect Orders:** Set to **True** if the orders are to be inspected prior to printing (Default is **False**).
- **Apply LDC:** If you want local density control (LDC) to be applied prior to printing, set this option to **True**.
- **Wait For Result File:** Set to **True** if you only want to print when the current order has been completed. (Depending on the setup of the Masterflex software, this may need to be set to **False**).
- **Time Out Seconds:** If the Ethernet connection between the printer and the APM and/or Lab 50 machine is slow, then change this to a higher value from the default of 120.
- **Succeed On Timeout:** Leave as **False**, unless otherwise instructed for troubleshooting purposes.
- **Print Index:** If the index is to be created at the Printer instead of the APM and/or Lab 50 machine, set this option to **True**, and then set the **Index Width** and **Index Height** to the proper sizes (in inches).
- **Debug Mode:** If after changing all of the settings the Masterflex interface does not work, come back to this screen and set to **True**. (Default is **False**.)
- **Back Print:** Used to specify the desired back print format using the case-sensitive parameters listed below. The default is %ORDER%*%ITEM%*(%PRODUCT% %FINISH%)%QTY%
The following is a list of available case-sensitive parameters that may be used:
- **%ORDER%** - Order Number
- **%PRODUCT%** - Product Name
- **%PROD\_ID%** - Product Id
- **%FINISH%** - Finish option (glossy/matte)
- **%QTY%** - Quantity
- **%ORIG\_FN%** - Original File Name
- **%ITEM%** - Item Index
- **%YEAR%** - Current 4 digit year
- **%MONTH%** - Current 2 digit month
- **%DAY%** - Current 2 digit day
- **%FNAME%** - Customer first name
- **%LNAME%** - Customer last name
- **%PHONE%** - Customer phone number
- **Render DPI:** Enter the desired render DPI in this field. The default is 300.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Gretag Settings Screen |
---
## Gretag Masterflex-D
The Gretag MasterflexD interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format the Gretag and/or a SMI Masterflex/Masternet/Master Plus machine running with the optional HotfoldersEx module can accept and print.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine need to be able to see the Masterflex machine across the local area network and vice versa.
2. The HotfoldersEx module (which is an add-on license from San Marco Imaging) must be properly configured and running on the printer with the HotfoldersEX shared out so other machines can write files and folders to it. (Please refer to the Gretag and/or SMI Masterflex/Masternet/Master Plus documentation for setup, as it may be on the F:\ Drive of the machine depending on the make and model of the printer).
3. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up the Master-Flex D Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Gretag and/or SMI Masterflex/Masternet/Master Plus Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Assigning Products to the KIS DKS Interface
After the KIS DKS interface has been properly added and configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane** will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the KIS DKS interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the DKS Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure DKS Interface settings in Lab 50, including path setup, priority levels, back print templates, and product configuration.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **KIS DKS Interface**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“KIS”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **KIS DKS** Interface option on the top left to display the options for this interface.
**KIS-DKS General Settings:**
- **DKS Path:** Enter the UNC path to the desired folder location to which orders from the APM should copy. This should be set to \*\\DKS\rep\_DKS\sortie\_print\*, which is the priority folder.
- **DKS Alternate Priority Path:** Set this option to the secondary path that will serve as a drop point for orders that
are set to the priority level designated in the settings later in this appendix. Normally, this location should be \\DKS\rep\_dks\ordre-externe\.
- **Temporary Folder Path:** The UNC path to the folder on the local kiosk where order files are placed before being sent to the DKS. The default setting is \*C:\APM\_FOLDERS\DKS\_Tmp\*.
- **Priority to Alternate Path:** Orders are normally sent to the path specified in the **DKS Path** setting, however, when an order priority type matches the setting specified in this field, the order will be sent to the path specified as the **DKS Alternate Priority Path**.
- **Primary** and **Secondary Priority, Cutoff, and Path:** For each of the three fulfillments, these settings are explained in the Setting Priorities section below. Unless there are specific time-sensitive or print count requirements in the order, then the priorities can all be set to **normal** and with a print cutoff of **0**.
- **Back Print Line 1 Template** and **Back Print Line 2 Template:** Used to specify the desired back print format using the case-sensitive parameters listed below.
The following is a list of available case-sensitive parameters that may be used:
- **%ORDER%** - Order Number
- **%PRODUCT%** - Product Name
- **%PROD\_ID%** - Product Id
- **%FINISH%** - Finish option (glossy/matte)
- **%QTY%** - Quantity
- **%ORIG\_FN%** - Original File Name
- **%ITEM%** - Item Index
- **%YEAR%** - Current 4 digit year
- **%MONTH%** - Current 2 digit month
- **%DAY%** - Current 2 digit day
- **%FNAME%** - Customer first name
- **%LNAME%** - Customer last name
- **%PHONE%** - Customer phone number
- **Glossy Index** and **Matte Index:** Set these options to **0** and **1**, respectively, so that they are in line with the default settings on the DKS.
- **Debug Mode:** If after changing all of the settings the KIS-DKS printer interface does not work, come back to this screen and set this to **True**. The default value is false.
- **Products Configured:** This is used to configure the paper size user for each product. See the Product Setup section of this appendix for detailed instructions.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| KIS DKS Interface |
---
## KIS-DKS Printer
The KIS-DKS Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an into a format that the KIS-DKS printer can accept and print.
### Prerequisites
| |
|:---------------------------------------|
|  |
| Required Environment Variables for DKS |
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the DKS machine across the local area network and vice versa. There are some special considerations for the networking, and based upon the current network configuration, some or all of these items may need to be setup in order to print to the DKS:
- Since the DKS is not a network aware minilab, and orders must be sent to the DKS machine, it is imperative that the APM or Lab 50 machine be able create, move, and edit files in the DKS shared directory named *rep\_dks* (\\Dks\rep\_dks), as well as its sub-directories.
- The DKS machine has an IP address of 192.168.0.1 and a custom subnet mask of 255.255.0.0, but this can be changed on the DKS to get it on the existing local network.
\*\***Note:** These settings are overwritten anytime a DKS receives a software update, so if a customer does change the DKS network settings, they should definitely record what the IP address is before updating. It will always need to be a static IP.
- The workgroup name of the DKS minilab is **IMPAG**. If need be, the Lab 50 machine or the APMs printing directly to it may need to be configured to be part of this workgroup.
- The username for the minilab is DKS and the password is blank. This username may need to be added to the local users group on the
machine running Lab 50 (or on the APMs if they are sending the orders to the DKS individually).
2. The DKS paper sizes in use will need to be known prior to setup, so the products in the APM and/or Lab 50 software can print to the correct paper.
3. On the machine or machines sending the orders, special settings may need to be added to the ‚Environment Variables? settings in Windows XP.
\*\***Note:** This should be done for you by the APM software Installer, but if this is not the case, follow these instructions:
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| System Variables Window |
1. Right-click on the **My Computer** icon.
2. Select **Properties**.
3. Click on **Advanced**.
4. Click on the **Environment Variables**.
5. At the bottom half of the screen in the System Variables section, scroll down until the **PATH** option appears.
6. Highlight **PATH** and then click on **Edit**.
7. In the variable value field, scroll to the end of the field and then enter the following right after the last character: \*;C:\APM\;C:\APM\Plugins\*
8. Click the **OK** button to save the changes.
9. Click the **OK** button again on the Environment Variables window to close it.
10. Click the **OK** button to close the System Properties window.
4. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot on below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting Up the DKS Interface Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the KIS-DKS Printer Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Setting DKS priority levels.
3. Product setup from within the interface.
4. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the DKS Interface
*Learn how to configure, add, edit, and delete products in the DKS interface, including setting the correct paper magazine size and orientation.*
Each product needs to be configured with the correct paper magazine size in the DKS.
**Configuring Products:**
1. Select the **Products Configured** line to highlight it (the area around **Products Configured** will turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side.
3. This will launch a dialog with a listing of configured products. There are options to **Add**, **Edit**, or **Delete** each product.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Adding/Editing a Product |
**Adding/Editing Products:**
1. To add a product, click on the **Add** button. To edit, select a product and click on the **Edit** button. This will launch a new window with the product settings.
2. In the **Products** field, use the drop-down menu to select the product.
3. Check the appropriate size and orientation to match the paper size in use on the DKS. If it is not listed, please enter the correct dimensions by selecting the **Custom Size** option and enter the size in millimeters.
4. Click **OK** when finished.
5. Repeat Steps 1-4 for any other sizes and products that need to be added and configured.
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the size you wish to delete from the main product listing window.
2. Press the **Delete** button.
---
## Setting Priorities
*Configure primary and secondary priority queues for DKS fulfillment types based on print count cutoffs to route orders to the correct paths.*
The DKS Interface allows for setting up priority queues for each fulfillment based on the number of prints. There is a **Primary** and **Secondary Priority** for each of the three fulfillments, as well as a priority setting based on the number of prints. To set the primary priority:
1. Use the drop-down menu on the far right of the field for **Express Primary Priority**, **Pickup Primary Priority**, and/or **Mail Pickup Priority** and set the desired priority. The options are: **not set, high, normal, low, hold**. The orders that are set to fall into the priority path category based on the number of prints will be sent to the location set in DKS Path.
2. Set the value for the number of number of prints to differentiate between Priority and Secondary prints, so that an order will either go into the Priority or Secondary Queue for the given fulfillment based on how many prints are in the order. There is a setting for each fulfillment: **Express Prints Cutoff**, **Pickup Prints Cutoff**, and **Mail Prints Cutoff**. The default is **150**. If all prints are supposed to go to the same queue no matter how many prints are ordered, set the number in this field to 0, all prints will go to the **DKS Path**.
3. To setup a secondary priority, use the drop-down menu on the far right of the field for **Express Secondary Priority**, **Pickup Secondary Priority**, and/or **Mail Secondary Priority** and set the desired priority. The options are: **not set, high, normal, low, hold**. The orders that are set to fall into the priority path category based on the number of prints will be sent to the location set in DKS Alternate Priority Path.
4. If any order from any fulfillment is supposed to go to an alternate folder (i.e. DKS **Alternate Priority Path**), then set the priority in the **Priority to Alternate Path** field. The options are: **not set, high, normal, low, hold**. The priority for this field will typically be the same setting as the **Express Secondary**, **Pickup Secondary** and **Mail Secondary Priorities**. If the priority is not set, then the orders will default back to the folder set in DKS PATH.
\*\***Note:** For more information on this, each field has an explanation at the bottom of the screen when you click on it in the Setup Wizard.
---
## Assigning Products to the Konica DPOF Interface
After the Konica DPOF interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation** Pane will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Konica DPOF interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the Konica DPOF Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure Konica DPOF interface settings, including folder paths, back print parameters, and rendering options for accurate print orders.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Konica DPOF**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“Konica”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Konica DPOF** Interface option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**Konica DPOF General Settings:**
- **Folder:** Enter the location of the desired DPOF folder where the orders will go. The default is c:\QDIF-3\QDPRINT.
\*\***Note:** It is recommended that the QDIF-3 folder be shared out so that the Konica printer can see it from across the network and access and modify the orders that will go into this folder.
- **Back Print:** Used to specify the desired back print format using the case-sensitive parameters listed below. (The default value is to print the APM order number and the item number, **%ORDER%, %ITEM%**)
The following is a list of available case-sensitive parameters that may be used:
- **%ORDER%** - Order Number
- **%PRODUCT%** - Product Name
- **%PROD\_ID%** - Product ID
- **%FINISH%** - Finish option (glossy/matte)
- **%QTY%** - Quantity
- **%ORIG\_FN%** - Original File Name
- **%ITEM%** - Item Index
- **%YEAR%** - Current 4 digit year
- **%MONTH%** - Current 2 digit month
- **%DAY%** - Current 2 digit day
- **%FNAME%** - Customer first name
- **%LNAME%** - Customer last name
- **%PHONE%** - Customer phone number
- **GEN CRT** and **VUQ NUM:** Use the drop-down menus to select whether the orders will go to a QD-21 or an R1/R1. Please make sure to set both fields to the same value properly by leaving the default **KonicaR1SUPER** or entering **Konica QD-21**. Both fields are case sensitive.
- **Wait for Print:** If set to **True**, the APM and/or Lab 50 software will not print the next order until the Konica minilab has confirmed that it is at the printer. The recommended setting is **False**.
- **Use APM Order Number:** If set to **True**, the order folders will be renamed according to the last four numeric digits of the APM order number, as shown on printed receipts. It is ideal to leave it as **True** in order to match the orders through the printing process. If multiple APMs are printing to the Konica without Lab 50 acting as print management software, then leave this setting at **False**.
- **Render Images:** This option will pre-render all images before they are sent to the printer, providing the correct aspect ratio and border settings. Recommended setting is **True** (Default is **False**).
- **Render DPI:** Enter the desired render DPI in this field. The default is 300. This is only used if the **Render Images** is set to **True**.
- **Debug Mode:** If after changing all of the settings the Konica DPOF interface does not work, come back to this screen and set this to **True**. (Default is **False**.)
- **Purge Days:** Enter the number of days to keep the orders saved on the machine. Setting it to 0 will keep the files indefinitely. Otherwise, the APM and/or Lab 5 machine will delete any orders older than the set number of days when the software opens.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Konica DPOF Settings |
---
## Konica DPOF
The Konica DPOF interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into an order structure that the Konica QD-21 and Konica R1/R2 can recognize and print.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the Konica machine across the local area network and vice versa.
2. On the Konica machine, the necessary print channels need to be setup prior to the APM/Lab 50 setup.
3. The QDIF folder on the APM/Lab 50 machine needs to be shared out so that the Konica can see it from across the network.
4. The Konica printer must be configured to look to the shared folder for incoming orders.
5. If there are Glossy and Matte options available at the kiosk, then it is best to make sure that two different Konica DPOF interfaces are setup and configured, so that one handles Glossy and one handles Matte. These two interfaces should also be setup to output to different folders.
6. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up the Konica DPOF Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to Konica DPOF Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the Konica DPOF Interface
*Configure and manage product print channels in the Konica DPOF interface, including adding, editing, and deleting product settings accurately.*
Each product needs to be configured to match up the appropriate print channel setup for it in the Konica.
| |
|:--------------------------------|
|  |
| Configure Print Channels Window |
**Configuring Products:**
1. Select the **Configure Product Channels** line to highlight it (the area around **Configure Product Channels** will turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side.
3. This will launch Configure Print Channels window. There are options to **Add**, **Edit**, or **Delete** each product.
**Adding/Editing Products:**
1. To add a channel, select the line and click on **Add**. To edit, click **Edit**.
2. This will launch either the **Add Print Channel** or **Edit Print Channel** window, depending on the button selected.
3. Use the drop-down menu to select the **Product ID** for the product you are configuring.
4. **Set Psize Width** and **Psize Height** to the print size width and height in millimeters.
5. Enter the **PCN Name** for the product. This is the Print Channel to be used for the product as configured in the Konica printer. Example: 4 inch paper is 4R.
6. Use **Border Size Standard** to enter the standard border size. The default is -1.5000, and this value should be kept as default for all sizes.
7. Set **Border Size Bordered** to the border size for prints of this size with borders. The default is 3.1750. (\*\***Note:** All data fields here forth should have information entered to the fourth decimal place, i.e. "3.0000".)
8. For **Width Inches**, set the width of the product in inches. This should be slightly smaller than the true size, in terms of hundredths of an inch. Typically, subtracting 0.20 inches is sufficient. (Example: 6 inches should be entered as 5.9800 instead of 6.0000.)
9. For **Height Inches**, set the height of the product in inches. This should be slightly larger than the true size, in terms of hundredths of an inch. Typically, adding 0.20 inches is sufficient. (Example: 4 inches should be entered as 4.0200 instead of 4.0000.)
10. The **Orientation** field allows the lab to set the orientation prior to getting to the Konica software, thus saving the operator time by not having to rotate images. Set the orientation for each size as needed.
11. Click **OK** once completed.
12. Repeat the above steps for each size.
| |
|:---------------------------------|
|  |
| Adding/Editing a Product Channel |
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the product to delete and highlight it.
2. Click on the **Delete** button.
---
## Assigning Products to the Noritsu DPOF Interface
After the Noritsu DPOF interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
 
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**. (Image 1 above)
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane** will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**. (Image 2 above)
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Noritsu DPOF interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Assigning Products to the Noritsu NetOrder Interface
After the Noritsu NetOrder interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation** Pane will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Noritsu NetOrder interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the Noritsu DPOF Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure Noritsu DPOF interface settings in Lab 50, including folder paths, back print options, and duplexing support.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Noritsu DPOF**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“DPOF”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Noritsu DPOF** Interface option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**Noritsu DPOF General Settings:**
- **Folder:** Enter the UNC path to the desired folder location where it stores all the incoming orders for Noritsu to pick up. (Default is *C:\NoritsuDPOFPrinter*. Other examples that would work would be **\\Labserver\APMIncoming**, *D:\APMOrders,* etc.)
> [!IMPORTANT]
> Note on the DPOF Output Folder
>
> If the folder location is on the network, please make sure that this folder is shared out and set to allow other users and computers (such as the QSS or EZ Controller) access to view and modify the files from across the network.
- **Wait For Response:** If set to **True**, the APM software will wait for a printed status from the Noritsu software to determine if the current order was successfully printed before sending a new order. (Default is **False**.)
- **Timeout Seconds:** Leave as default (which is 180 seconds) unless instructed to change for troubleshooting purposes.
- **Use APM Order Number:** When set to **True**, the order folders will then be renamed according to the last six numeric digits of the APM order number, as shown on the printed receipt. It is ideal to leave it as **True**, so orders will be organized in a logical way through the printing process.
- **Succeed On Timeout:** Marks the order as successful when a timeout occurs. Do no change unless instructed for troubleshooting purposes. Default is **True**.
- **Purge Complete:** With this option set to **True**, the orders that are successfully printed will be deleted from the folder location that is specified in the **Folder** field. If **False**, all the orders will be stored until manually get deleted. This setting also requires that **Wait for Response** is set to **True**. Default is **False**.
- **Back Print 1 and Back Print 2:** Used to specify the desired back print format using the case-sensitive parameters listed below. (Default is to print the APM order number and the item number, **%ORDER%, %ITEM%**)
The following is a list of available case-sensitive parameters that may be used:
- **%ORDER%** - Order Number
- **%PRODUCT%** - Product Name
- **%PROD\_ID%** - Product Id
- **%FINISH%** - Finish option (glossy/matte)
- **%QTY%** - Quantity
- **%ORIG\_FN%** - Original File Name
- **%ITEM%** - Item Index
- **%YEAR%** - Current 4 digit year
- **%MONTH%** - Current 2 digit month
- **%DAY%** - Current 2 digit day
- **%FNAME%** - Customer first name
- **%LNAME%** - Customer last name
- **%PHONE%** - Customer phone number
- **Render Images:** This option will pre-render all images before they are sent to the printer, providing the correct aspect ratio and border settings. Recommended setting is True (Default is False).
- **Net Order Compatibility:** Set to True only if you want to send orders to the Noritsu printer in NetOrder mode.
\*\***Note:** This also assumes that NetOrder Mode is enabled on the minilab.
- **Supports Duplexing:** Enable this setting if your Noritsu printer supports duplexing. This feature is only available in DPOF version 1.7 of greater, and the printer hardware must support this functionality.
- **Debug Mode:** If after changing all the settings the Noritsu DPOF interface does not work, come back into this screen and set this to **True**. (Default is **False**.)
- **GEN CRT VER, VUQ VNM, VUQ VNM ATR, VUQ VER,** and **GEN REV:** These fields should be left to their default setting.
- **GEN CRT NAME:** This field is set to **APM** as default. This does not need to be changed.
- **Use MOC for CD-ROMS:** Used to send Image CD orders to the Noritsu for processing the order. This is used with Noritsu software version 6.
---
## Editing the Noritsu NetOrder Interface Settings
*Learn how to edit Noritsu NetOrder interface settings, including IP address, timeout, print options, and back print parameters for accurate order printing.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Noritsu NetOrder**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“NetOrder”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Noritsu NetOrder** Interface option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**Noritsu Net Order General Settings:**
- **QSS IP Address:** Enter the IP address of the printer. If the QSS software is installed locally, use **127.0.0.1**.
- **Timeout Seconds:** Leave as default (which is 60 seconds) unless instructed to change for troubleshooting purposes.
- **Debug:** If after changing all of the settings, the Noritsu NetOrder interface does not work, come back into this screen and set this to **True**. (Default is **False**.)
- **Wait For Print:** If set to **True**, the APM software will wait for a printed status from the Noritsu software to determine if the current order was successfully printed before sending a new order. (Default is **False**.)
- **Matte Surface** and **Glossy Surface** Check that these numbers match up with how they are setup in the QSS software on the printer. (Default is 2 for matte and 1 for Glossy). If they are different than the default, then enter the correct values for both **Matte Surface** and **Glossy Surface**.
- **Index Print:** If an index print is needed for every order, then select **True**. If not, then leave it as **False**. (If an order calls for index print while this setting is false, it will still print an index print)
- **Back Print 1** and **Back Print 2:** Used to specify the desired back print format using the case-sensitive parameters listed below. Default is **%ORDER%*%ITEM%*(%PRODUCT% %FINISH%)%QTY%**.
The following is a list of available case-sensitive parameters that may be used:
- **%ORDER%** - Order Number
- **%PRODUCT%** - Product Name
- **%PROD\_ID%** - Product Id
- **%FINISH%** - Finish option (glossy/matte)
- **%QTY%** - Quantity
- **%ORIG\_FN%** - Original File Name
- **%ITEM%** - Item Index
- **%YEAR%** - Current 4 digit year
- **%MONTH%** - Current 2 digit month
- **%DAY%** - Current 2 digit day
- **%FNAME%** - Customer first name
- **%LNAME%** - Customer last name
- **%PHONE%** - Customer phone number
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Noritsu NetOrder Interface |
---
## Noritsu NetOrder
The Noritsu NetOrder interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format a Noritsu machine running in NetOrder mode can accept and print.
\*\***Note:** This is an older interface and is rarely used. Instead, it is best to use the Noritsu DPOF interface and set it up for NetOrder compatibility mode. However, this interface is available for those who still wish to use it.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 need to be able to see the Noritsu machine across the local area network and vice versa.
2. NetOrder mode must be properly configured and running on the Noritsu printer. (Please refer to Noritsu documentation for setup).
3. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up the Noritsu NetOrder with Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the NetOrder interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Noritsu DPOF
The Noritsu DPOF interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into the same order structure as a Noritsu CT-1/CT-2 machine with auto print channel and quantity mapping.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the Noritsu machine across the local area network and vice versa.
2. On the Noritsu machine, the necessary print channels need to be setup prior to the APM/Lab 50 setup. This includes separate channels for glossy/matte finishes.
3. The Noritsu machine needs to be on Version E or higher.
4. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
**Setting up the Noritsu DPOF Using the Setup Wizard**
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to Noritsu DPOF Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
4. Pulling the order into the Noritsu software.
---
## Product Setup within the Noritsu DPOF Interface
*Learn how to add, edit, and delete products in the Noritsu DPOF interface, including print channel, size letter, and finish setup steps.*
Each product needs to be setup to match up the appropriate print channel setup in the Noritsu. This must be done for each and every product that will go to this interface. It is also best to account for both Glossy and Matte finishes (even if only one is available). The following steps explain how to do this:
**Adding Products:**
1. Click on **Add Product** to highlight the line (the word **Add Product** will turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side. This will launch a dialog box giving you the properties for the new product.
3. Use the drop-down menu to select the product to be added.
4. Set the **Print Channel** to the matching print channel that is used on the Noritsu machine for this product.
5. The **Size Letter** is a string that will be appended to the end of the order folder name. Normally, this can be anything you wish to set. However, keep in mind that if two different products use the same **Size Letter**, then order directories might get overwritten.
> [!IMPORTANT]
> Important Information on the Size Letter setting
>
> When you are configuring the product **Size Letter**, unique names should be used for each product. For clarity in processing orders, Lucidiom recommends the name relate to the product and finish, and start with a dash "-" for readability. Example: "-4x6G" is used for 4x6 Print Glossy product, and "-4x6FCG" is for 4x6 Flat Card Glossy.
>
> Ideally every product should have a unique size letter description to prevent products from overwriting one another during order conversion to the DPOF format.
6. Enter the **Print Size** of the paper magazine that will be used for this product. Example: 4R is referred to as 4 inch paper.
7. Set the **Product Width** and **Product Height** to the width and height of the product.
8. Use the **Finish** dropdown to select either Glossy or Matte for the finish option. (**\*\*Note:** Regardless of whether both glossy and matte channels are available for a particular size, it is necessary to add the size twice - once for glossy finish, and once for matte. If only one finish is available for a product, then the size must still be added twice, but can be assigned the same **Print Channel** number.)
9. Set the **DPI** to 300, which is the default value.
10. Hit **OK** to finish adding the product.
11. Once you have added a product, you can click on the "+" to expand the options for review or further editing. Within the expanded options, you will also see a setting to **Use channel for order directories**. This setting will include the print channel information as part of the folder naming scheme for the data conversion. By default, this setting is set to *false*.
**Editing Products:**
1. To edit products that are already set up in the list, first find the corresponding product ID and click on the "+" sign to expand the list. Refer to the previous section on details of each field.
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the **Delete product channel** line to highlight it (the area around **Delete product channel** will turn blue).
2. Click the small button labeled ‚…” that appears on the right-hand side.
3. Click **OK** in the confirmation box, and the product will be deleted.
---
## Product Setup within the Noritsu NetOrder Interface
Each product that you wish to print will need to be configured to match with the appropriate paper sizes that are setup in the QSS Software. Each product has its own internal APM Product ID:
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Adding a Product |
**Adding a Product:**
1. Click on **Add Product** to highlight the line (the word **Add Product** will turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side. This will launch a dialog box giving you the properties for the new product.
3. Enter the correct **Paper Size Height** and **Paper Size Width** in mm.
4. Enter the correct **Render Size Height** and **Render Size Width** in mm. Unless otherwise stated, this value can be the same as the **Paper Size**. (\*\***Note:** The Render Size settings are important to ensuring a proper print. Please make sure these values are entered.)
5. Click **OK** to save the changes.
6. Repeat for each product needed.
**Editing Products:**
1. To edit products that are already set up in the list, first find the corresponding product ID and click on the ‚+” sign to expand the list. Refer to the previous section on details of each field.
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Editing an Existing Product |
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the **Delete this product paper size** line to highlight it (the area around **Delete this product paper size** will turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side.
Click **OK** on the confirmation box, and the product will be deleted.
---
## Pulling Orders into the Noritsu Software
The DPOF interface is used by the APM software to create the same order structure generated from a Noritsu CT-1 or Noritsu CT-2 machine.
Each product channel/size will have its own folder, so keep in mind that there may be several folders of images for each order.
**To import an APM order into the Noritsu software:**
1. Select the **Network CT-1** button, or a similarly named feature, in the Noritsu software.
2. Click on **Start**.
3. This will then bring up a screen similar to the below.
4. Navigate to the machine where the Order directory was created and shared. (In the example used, "Order" folder is shared out and configured to store all of the incoming APM orders.)
5. Click **Yes:OK**. If you already have orders in this directory, the folder will look something like the sample on the next page. The orders will reside in this folder on the APM and/or Lab 50 machine until they are imported or deleted.
The name of the order folder tells you several things about the order. For example, lets reference order "o851070g".
- o85 indicates that it is from APM 7285 (due to folder naming limitations by Noritsu, only the last 2 digits of the APM ID are shown)
- The folder contains images from order number is 72851070.
- The suffix letter is g, and in this instance g maps to Noritsu print channel 9. Again, for user readability, it is preferable to use suffix letter like ‘-4x6G’ that includes the product name as well the finish option.
**To print an order:**
1. Select the folder you want to print, then click **Yes:OK**.
2. All images for that size/channel will appear in the editing screen to operate.
3. Make the necessary corrections and send the images to print. The software will then mark the order as printed and the APM or Lab 50 will delete the folder if **Purge Complete** setting is turned on in the Setup Wizard.
4. Repeat for each folder to print, until one whole order is completed. (\*\***Note:** Order folders that have the same 6 numeric digits, indicating the fact that they are from the same order.)
5. Assuming that all sizes and finishes are setup properly, then the images will print and the back print will show the information configured to print.
\*\***Note:** These instructions may differ depending on the model of the Noritsu machine you are using and the software you have installed. Please contact Lucidiom technical support if you require further assistance.
---
## Assigning Products to the Noritsu QSS HotFolder Interface
After the Noritsu QSS HotFolder interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane** will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Noritsu QSS HotFolder interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the Customization Pane, and use the context menu options, such as Set ALL formats to… or Set all unassigned formats to…
---
## Editing the QSS HotFolder Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure and edit the Noritsu QSS HotFolder interface settings, including folder paths, back print parameters, and rendering options.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
Once you have the Setup Wizard open:
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select Noritsu **QSS HotFolder**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“QSS”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Noritsu QSS HotFolder** Interface option on the top left to display the options for this interface.
**Noritsu QSS Hotfolder General Settings:**
- **Folder:** This should be set the same value as the HotFolder Directory path in the Noritsu QSS HotFolder software (Default is \*C:\NoritsuQSSHotFolder\*). If the folder is located on a separate machine on which Noritsu QSS Hot Folder software is installed, the computer name needs to be included (e.g. \\ComputerName\NoritsuQSSHotFolder )
- **Timeout Seconds:** Leave as default (which is 60 seconds) unless instructed to change for troubleshooting purposes.
- **Paper Fitting Flag:** Defines what fit the QSS software should use for prints. Options are **Real**, **Shrink**, and **Crop**. Default is **Real**.
- **CMS Flag:** When set to **On**, the QSS software will use the color management profile of the printer. Set to **Off** by default.
- **Back Print 1** and **Back Print 2:** Used to specify the desired back print format using the case-sensitive parameters listed below. (Default is to print the APM order number and the item number, **%ORDER%, %ITEM%**)
The following is a list of available case-sensitive parameters that may be used:
- **%ORDER%** - Order Number
- **%PRODUCT%** - Product Name
- **%PROD\_ID%** - Product ID
- **%FINISH%** - Finish option (glossy/matte)
- **%QTY%** - Quantity
- **%ORIG\_FN%** - Original File Name
- **%ITEM%** - Item Index
- **%YEAR%** - Current 4 digit year
- **%MONTH%** - Current 2 digit month
- **%DAY%** - Current 2 digit day
- **%FNAME%** - Customer first name
- **%LNAME%** - Customer last name
- **%PHONE%**- Customer phone number
- **Surface Matte** and **Surface Glossy:** Check that these numbers match up with how they are setup in the QSS software on the printer. (Default is 2 for matte and 1 for Glossy). If they are different than the default, then enter the correct values for both **Surface Matte** and **Surface Glossy**.
- **Success On Time Out:** Marks the order as successful when a timeout occurs. Do no change unless instructed for troubleshooting purposes. Default is **True**.
- **Render Images:** This option will pre-render all images before they are sent to the printer, providing the correct aspect ratio and border settings. Recommended setting is **True** (Default is **False**).
- **Render DPI:** Enter the desired render DPI in this field. The default is 300. This is only used if the Render Images is set to True.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Noritsu HotFolder Settings |
---
## Noritsu QSS HotFolder
The Noritsu QSS HotFolder interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format the Noritsu QSS Hot Folder software (which is an available option from Noritsu) can accept and print.
\*\***Note:** This interface has been superseded by the Noritsu DPOF printer interface. It is highly recommended to use the DPOF interface in place of the QSS Hotfolder interface, it provides greater control over order placement and processing.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 need to be able to see the Noritsu QSS HotFolder machine across the local area network and vice versa.
2. In the Noritsu QSS HotFolder software, it is required to enter in the IP Address of the Noritsu Printer, and the Hot Folder Directory which should be the same path as the order output folder of the APM or Lab 50 machine.
3. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot on the next page, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Noritsu Hot Folder Settings |
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up the QSS HotFolder Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Noritsu QSS HotFolder Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the Noritsu QSS HotFolder Interface
Each product that you wish to print will need to be configured to match up with the appropriate paper sizes that are setup in the QSS Software. Each product has its own internal APM Product ID:
**Configuring Products:**
1. Select the **Product Paper Sizes** line to highlight it (the area around **Product Paper Sizes** turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side.
3. This will launch **Product Paper Sizes** window. There are options to **Add**, **Edit**, or **Delete** each product.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Product Paper Sizes Window |
|  |
| Product Paper Sizing Window |
**Adding/Editing Products:**
1. To add a channel, click on **Add**. To edit, select a size and click **Edit**. This will launch the **Product Paper Sizing** window.
2. Enter the correct **Paper width** and **Paper length** in mm.
3. Enter the correct **Render width** and **Render length** in mm. Unless otherwise stated, these values can be the same as the Paper width and Paper length. (\*\***Note:** The Render settings are important to ensuring a proper print. Please make sure these values are entered.)
4. Click **OK** to save the changes.
5. Repeat for each product needed.
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the size you wish to delete from the **Product Paper Sizes** window.
2. Press the **Delete** button.
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
---
## Assigning Products to the PDF Printer Interface
After the PDF Printer interface has been properly added and configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation** Pane will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the PDF Printer interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the PDF Printer Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure the PDF Printer interface in Lab 50’s Setup Wizard, including printer selection, SNMP checks, and automatic product settings.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the Setup Wizard button, and the **Setup Wizard** will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **PDF Printer**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“PDF”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **PDF Printer** Interface option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**PDF Printer General Settings:**
- **Printer:** In this field, use the drop-down menu to select the correct printer name for this interface from the printers installed on this machine. By default, the EQ-9800/9850 printer should be selected.
- **Check for SNMP Printer:** This option should be checked by default. If the SNMP feature is enabled on the printer, the Setup Wizard can send queries for printer information. We recommend this setting always be enabled if the printer is configured to support it.
- **Automatically Configure Products:** If this option is checked, the APM software will automatically configure and maintain the PDF interface settings. This setting is enabled by default.
---
## PDF Printer
The PDF Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to print orders generated from an APM directly to an EQ-9800/9850 printer. The PDF Printer interface inherently works with the EQ 9800/9850, but an additional license update may be purchased in order to use the interface with printers other than the EQ 9800/9850.
### Prerequisites
There are several important configuration items that must be configured in order to work properly with the PDF interface:
1. The printer must be setup properly and configured to use the correct paper sizes and media types. See Chapter 10 for recommended tray configuration settings.
2. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the printer across the local area network (a valid IP address need to be set on the printer) and vice versa.
3. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) must be enabled on the printer to allow the Setup Wizard to send queries to the printer.
4. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot on below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting up the PDF Printer Interface Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the PDF Printer Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the PDF Printer Interface
*Learn how to configure product settings in the PDF Printer Interface, including paper trays, feed types, and duplex binding for accurate printing.*
In order for products to print properly using the PDF interface, it must be setup correctly. If you are using the recommended default Lucidiom tray settings, there is little to no configuration that needs to be done, as all the settings are pre-entered.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| PDF Printer Interface |
**Configuring Products:**
To add or edit a product, click on the **Configure Products** icon. This screen with offer a wide variety of choices for managing the products printed to the EQ-9800/9850.
- **Add Product:** Use this button to add a new product to the list. Further explanation detailed below.
- **Configure Product:** Highlight a product and press this button to change the settings. Further explanation detailed below.
- **Turn On Full Bleed:** Highlight a product and press this button to enable full bleed while printing. This may also be configured in the product settings window.
- **Turn Off Full Bleed:** Highlight a product and press this button to disable full bleed while printing. This may also be configured in the product settings window.
- **Reset All Products:** Will erase all existing product channel settings and restore the default settings, as defined by Lucidiom.
- **Delete Product:** Highlight a product and press this button to delete it.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Adding/Editing a Product |
**Adding/Editing Products:**
1. To add a product, click on the **Add Product…** button, or to edit an existing product, click on the **Configure Product…** button
2. The **Product Settings** screen comes up. Change or add the following settings, as necessary:
- **Paper Tray:** Choose the correct paper tray set up on the printer for printing this product.
- **Paper Type:** Choose the correct paper name that is placed in the tray.
\*\***Note:** For any tray with "Tabloid Extra" (12" x 18") paper, you will also need to change the "A3 Nobi" setting on the printer to differentiate Tabloid Extra and Japanese paper size called A3 Nobi.
- **Paper Width and Height:** These two fields are automatically set once a product is selected. If the paper size is not the same as the product size, change the values to match the exact paper width and height.
- **Unit of Measure:** Sizes are measured in either Inches or Millimeters.
- **Paper Feed:** This defines which side of the paper is being fed into the printer first. From a front, top-down perspective view of the tray, the paper is fed into the printer though the right-hand side. Includes two different feed types, long and short.
\*\***Note:** For paper that is not a 1:1 ratio, long edge feed should be the default setting with the exception of the folded card and 12x18 products.
- - **Long Edge Feed:** The longest edge of the paper is fed into the printer first. For example, with 8.5x11 paper, the 11 inch side is facing the right-hand side of the printer . Usually refers to a portrait orientation.
- - **Short Edge Feed:** The shortest edge of the paper is fed into the printer first. For example, with 10x7 paper, the 7 inch side is facing the right-hand side of the printer. Usually refers to a landscape orientation.
- **Duplex Type:** Refers to the orientation of the image or layout on the page. The edge, long or short, is the side of the paper on which the finished product is rotated. For example, on an 11x8.5 book, the binding is short edge, due to the fact that the book pages are flipped on the 8.5 inch edge.
- - **Long Edge Binding:** Print will be orientated in such a way that the right or left side of the image/layout will be parallel with the longer edge of the paper.
- - **Short Edge Binding:** Print will be orientated in such a way that the right or left side of the image/layout will be parallel with the shorter edge of the paper.
- - **No Duplex:** Turns off two-sided printing for this product.
- **Booklet Type:** Refers to multiple images or layouts being printed on a side, referring to the orientation of the layouts on the page. Generally applies to pre-scored or folded products, like the 5x7 folded card.
- - **Two-Up Landscape:** Orientates the images/layouts in such a way that they are doubled-up on each side, and the right or left side of the images/layouts will be parallel with the shorter edge of the paper.
- - **Two-Up Portrait:** Orientates the images/layouts in such a way that they are doubled-up on each side, and the right or left side of the images/layouts will be parallel with the longer edge of the paper.
- - **No Booklet:** Turns off the doubling-up of images/layouts on each side.
- **Media Type:** Used to specify the type of media used to print the product.
- **Output Bin:** Use this setting to specify which output bin to use. Options are Upper Bin or Lower Bin, where Upper Bin is typically the default.
- **Shrink to Fit?:** Check the box to allow images to be shrunk to fit the paper size.
- **Is Last Page Flipped?:** Check this box if configuring a calendar product, so that the last page is printed in the correct orientation.
- **Rotate 180 Degrees?:** Check this box if configuring an envelope product, so that the envelope is printed in the correct orientation.
- **Confirm Paper Ready?:** Check this box to prompt the operator to confirm the correct paper is present in the tray. When this setting is enabled, a dialog box appears prompting the operator to confirm that the correct paper is in the tray. This is recommended if paper is switched between trays, such as the Multipurpose Tray.
- **Collate by Duplication?:** This setting allows for resending of the data for multiple copies of the same product. For certain products such as Folded Cards, it should be turned off.
- **Make Full Bleed:** With this option enabled, the product will print full bleed, or edge-to-edge, for the full product size. After printing the product, it will need to be cut down to the proper size.
\*\***Note:** The Full Bleed setting should only be used when paper larger than the product size is loaded in the tray. Attempting to print to paper that matches the product size when this setting is enabled will result in damage to your printer.
3. Click **OK** when finished.
4. Repeat steps 1-4 for any other sizes and products that need to be added and configured.
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the size you wish to delete from the **Configure Products** area.
2. Press the **Delete** button.
3. Hit **OK** in the confirmation box, and the product will be deleted.
---
## Assigning Products to the XConnect Interface
After the Photogize XConnect interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane** will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Photogize XConnect interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the **Customization Pane**, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the Photogize XConnect Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure the Photogize XConnect interface settings, including harvest folder paths, translations, timeout, and debug options.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server.
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Photogize XConnect**.
4. In the name **Printer Name** field, enter **“PG”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Photogize XConnect** Interface option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**Photogize XConnect General Settings:**
- **Harvest Folder:** This should be set to the same value as the **Polling Folder** path in the Photogize XConnect setup. (Default is \_C:\RasterFolder\_). If the folder is located on a separate machine on which Photogize is installed, the computer name needs to be included (e.g. \\ComputerName\RasterFolder ).
- **Configure Translations:** This is used to match product setup between Photogize and the APM. See the next section for detailed instructions.
- **Timeout Seconds:** Leave as default (which is 600 seconds) unless instructed to change for troubleshooting purposes.
- **Leave Order On Cancel:** Indicates whether or not to leave the order in the hot folder for printing later when a user cancels the job. The default value is False.
- **Debug:** If after changing all of the settings, the Photogize XConnect interface does not work, come back to this screen and set this to **True**. (The default value is False.)
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Photogize Interface |
---
## Photogize XConnect
The Photogize XConnect interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format the Photogize software (version 2.1 or higher) can accept and print.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine needs to be able to see the Photogize machine across the local area network and vice versa.
2. The products and auto-harvest option need to be setup prior to the APM or Lab 50 setup for the XConnect interface.
3. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot on below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting Up Photogize XConnect Interface Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Photogize XConnect Interface.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Product setup from within the interface.
3. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Product Setup within the Photogize XConnect Interface
*Learn how to configure product translations in the Photogize XConnect interface, including adding, editing, and deleting products for accurate order*
Each product needs to be setup to match with the appropriate translation in the XConnect software. This must be done for each and every product that will go to this interface. It is also best to account for both Glossy and Matte finishes (even if only one is available).
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Configure Translations Window |
**Configuring Products:**
1. Select the **Configure Translations** line to highlight it (the area around **Configure Translations** will turn blue).
2. Click on the small button labeled "…" that appears on the right-hand side.
3. This will launch the Configure Translations window. There are options to **Add**, **Edit**, or **Delete** each product.
**Adding/Editing Products:**
1. To add a translation, click on the **Add** button. To edit a product, select it by clicking on it then click on the **Edit** button. This will launch the **Product Translation** window.
2. In the **Product ID** field, use the drop-down menu to select a product.
3. Set the **Canvas Width** and the **Canvas Height** to the width and height of the product.
4. For **Canvas DPI, 300** is generally used.
5. The **Finish** option can be either glossy or matte.
6. **Translation** needs to match the name that is specified in the server.xml file generated by the **Photogize XConnect**. (See Setting up **Photogize XConnect** earlier in this appendix). This field is case-sensitive.
7. Sizing should be set to **Crop**.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Product Translation Window |
**Deleting a Product:**
1. Select the size you wish to delete from the **Configure Translations** window.
2. Press the **Delete** button.
\*\***Note:** Make sure to account for all products, not just the print products. For example, 8x10 Prints, 8x10 Greeting Cards and 8x10 Wall Art are considered to be three unique products by the APM software. Therefore, each will need to be assigned to the printer and configured in a printer interface. Failing to account for an offered product will cause orders to fail.
---
## Setting Up Photogize XConnect
The first step in setting up Photogize and the APM/Lab 50 software to interface with one another is to setup the XConnect feature in Photogize. This feature allows for 3rd party applications such as the APM to connect and send orders to Photogize.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Account Properties |
1. On the Photogize main screen click on the **Orders** folder on the left.
2. Click on the **Account Properties** button (It’s the button with the A and the hammers on it).
3. In the **Account Properties** window, select the **XConnect** tab.
4. Check the **Auto Harvest** box.
5. Enter the location for the **Polling Folder** where you would like the orders from the APM or Lab 50 to go to and where Photogize can then harvest them. This can be a mapped drive letter such as E:\ or a folder on the hard drive such as *C:\APMOrders*
6. Lower the **Poll Every** to your preferred time. The default is 5 minutes, but it may be better to lower it to 3 minutes or less depending on the amount of expected orders coming, network bandwidth, and expected print turn-around time.
7. Click **OK** to save your settings
8. Go to the **Polling Folder** location and confirm that a file called server.xml is there. (\*\***Note:** It may take some time for the server.xml to be created, and Photogize may need to be closed then reopened for it to generate.)
9. Open the *server.xml* file by double clicking on it. (It should open in either Internet Explorer or Notepad.)
10. Make a note of the number of products and record the <name> for the product as this will be used to match up the APM products with the Photogize products. It is important to keep in mind that this
file is based on the products setup in Photogize, and these may be unique to each and every lab. See the sample below for reference.
<product>
<name>4x6 Matte</name>
<description>Standard Print in Matte Finish</description>
<device>Generic MiniLab</device>
<widthinches1000>6000</widthinches1000>
<heightinches1000>4000</heightinches1000>
<unitpricepennies>49</unitpricepennies>
<weightounces100>5</weightounces100>
<numpricebreaks>5</numpricebreaks>
<pricebreak from=”1” to=”24”>
<qtypricepennies>49</qtypricepennies>
</pricebreak>
<pricebreak from=”25” to=”49”>
<qtypricepennies>44</qtypricepennies>
</pricebreak>
<pricebreak from=”50” to=”74”>
<qtypricepennies>39</qtypricepennies>
</pricebreak> <pricebreak from=”75” to=”99”>
<qtypricepennies>34</qtypricepennies>
</pricebreak>
<pricebreak from=”100” to=”999”>
<qtypricepennies>29</qtypricepennies>
</pricebreak>
<product>
11. Once all of the product names have been recorded, close the *server.xml* file without saving any changes.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Photogize Harvesting Orders |
---
## Shinko 2145 Firmware Update (02-2012)
*Learn how to install the Shinko S2145 firmware update from February 2012 to support new paper supplies while retaining compatibility with older paper.*
### Overview
In early 2012, Shinko switched to a different paper supplier for the Shinko S2145 printer. In order to support this new paper, an updated version of the firmware needs to be installed onto the printer to support the use of this paper. Once the Firmware has been installed on the printer, it can then print on the older paper as well as the newer paper.
### Steps to Install the Firmware
1. Ensure the printer is turned on connected to the computer.
2. If the ***Shinko Status Monitor*** is currently running in the system tray at the bottom right of the screen in the system tray, Quit the ***Shinko Status Monitor***. To do this right-click the ***Shinko Status Monitor*** icon in the task bar near the clock and select ***Exit***.
| |
|:----------------------------------------|
|  |
| Closing the ***Shinko Status Monitor*** |
3. Download the zip file containing the firmware update to the machine where the printer is connected.
***([Z0131800-04_CHC-S2145 Firmware upgrade.zip](..\..\..\attachments\.zip))***
4. Once downloaded extract the files to a folder on the desktop.
5. Double-click the ***S2145Upgrade.bat*** file (*not S2145Upgrade.exe file*).
| |
|:----------------------------------------|
|  |
| Running the ***S2145Upgrade.bat*** file |
6. Allow the update to complete (Note: this may take ~5 minutes).
7. Once complete turn off the computer and then the printer.
8. Turn the computer back on then the printer and the printer will be ready to print.
### Images of New Paper Packaging
| | |
|:-------------------------------|:-------------------------------|
|  |  |
---
## Shinko Color Setup
*Learn how to configure Shinko printer color management settings, including ICM options and color profiles, for optimal print output quality.*
Please follow these steps to configure the Shinko printer for optimal color quality. Keep in mind that once you make these changes, this will provide the most optimal output that the printer is capable of giving. Any additional color problems will have to be adjusted manually using the color correction feature of the driver (**Printing Preferences > Color > Color Correction and Advanced > Printing Defaults > Color > Color Correction**).
1. Click on the Start Menu, then navigate to Settings, and then Control Panel
2. Open up the ***Printers and Faxes*** control panel
3. Right-click on the Shinko driver and select ***Properties***.
4. Click on the ***Color Management*** tab.
5. Select the ***Manual*** radio button.
6. Under ***Color Profiles currently associated with this printer***, hit the ***Add*** button.
7. You’ll be given a file browser screen and pointed to the *"C:\WINDOWS\system32\spool\drivers\color"* directory.
8. Browse through the list until you see the file labeled ***sRGB Color Space Profile.icm***. Select it and then hit **“OK”**. The sRGB profile will now show up in the profile list.
9. Select the newly added sRGB profile and hit ***Set As Default***.
10. If there are any other color profiles in the list, select them and hit the **“Remove”** button so that the sRGB profile is the only profile listed.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
11. Click on the ***General*** tab.
12. Click on the ***Printing Preference*** button.
13. Select the ***"Color"*** tab
14. Under ***"ICM Method"***, use the dropdown box to select ***"ICM Disabled"***.
15. Under ***"ICM Intent"***, use the dropdown box to select ***"Pictures (Contrast)"***.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
16. Press the ***OK*** button.
17. Click on the ***"Advanced"*** tab, then ***"Printing Defaults"***.
18. **Repeat steps 13 through 16.**
19. Hit then ***OK*** button when finished.
After correcting these settings, you can also manually change the color balance by clicking on the ***"Color Correction"*** button in the ***"Color"*** tab. This will allow for fine adjustments in the output. Use the preview windows to judge the final result.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
---
## Assigning Products to the Silverwire OM HotFolder Interface
After the Silverwire OM HotFolder interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane** will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the printed products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select Silverwire OM HotFolder interface from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
---
## Editing the Silverwire OM HotFolder Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure the Silverwire OM HotFolder Interface settings, including printer setup, order file location, and DPI options.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom, left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen |
**Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:**
1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50.
2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it.
3. Select Print Server
4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch.
**Once you have the Setup Wizard open:**
1. Click on **Printer Configuration**.
2. Click on **Add Printer**.
3. In the menu at the right, select **Silverwire OM Hotfolder Interface**.
4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“Silverwire”**, or any name you wish to use.
5. Click the **Add** button.
6. Click on the newly created **Silverwire OM Hotfolder** Interface option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface.
**Silverwire OM HotFolder General Settings:**
- **Order File Location Destination:** The folder in which order images will be placed. By default this is C:\OMHotFolder, but it may also be a UNC type location such as \\StorageServer\APMOrders. As long as the machine can see the folder and write to it, then the Hot Folder path can be anywhere on the network.
- **DPI:** Enter the desired output DPI in this field. The default value is 200.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
|  |
| Silverwire OM Hotfolder Printer Interface |
---
## Silverwire OM HotFolder
The Silverwire OM HotFolder interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to convert orders generated from an APM into a format that can be manually queued in the Silverwire OM software.
### Prerequisites
1. The APM and/or Lab 50 machine needs to be able access the Hot Folder drop location, whether it be locally on the machine or across the network.
2. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot on below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard.
| |
|:----------------------------|
|  |
| Print Settings |
### Setting Up a Silverwire OM HotFolder Using the Setup Wizard
The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to a Silverwire OM Hotfolder.
**This process includes the following steps:**
1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings.
2. Assigning printable products to the interface.
---
## Assigning Products to the Windows Printer Interface
After the Windows Printer interface has been properly configured, the next step is to choose the products you wish to print.
| |
|:-------------------------------|
|  |
| Products Printed Here Screen |
|  |
| Product Matrix Screen |
1. Click on the **Products Printed Here** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. In the **Customization Pane**, place a checkmark next to all of the products that will be printed using the local APM printing engine.
3. The checkboxes at the top of the **Customization Pane** allow the ability to send one product to multiple printers, based upon either the fulfillment or the product finish.
- If **Send products to different printers based on the fulfillment** is checked, the **Product Matrix** option in the **Primary Navigation** Pane will expand from one to three selections, based upon the three fulfillments.
- If **Send products to different printers based on their surface** is checked, the listing of products in the **Product Matrix** option will expand to offer both glossy and matte options for each product.
\*\***Note:** For proper operation, make certain that every printable product, for each fulfillment, is checked for all available columns.
The last step involves assigning the print products to the printer interface.
1. Click on the **Product Matrix (All Fulfillments)** option in the **Primary Navigation Pane**.
2. For each product listed, click on the **Printer** column and select the Windows Printer from the drop-down menu.
3. If there is more than one **Product Matrix** option, repeat for each matrix.
4. To assign multiple products to a single printer, right-click anywhere in the Customization Pane, and use the context menu options, such as **Set ALL formats to…** or **Set all unassigned formats to…**
---
## Editing the Windows Printer Interface Settings
*Learn how to configure Windows Printer Interface settings, including general options, border alignment, and DPI, using the Setup Wizard in Lab 50.*
**Sending orders straight from the kiosk (Print Server):**
1. Press the bottom left corner of the intro screen.
2. Enter the pass code (default is 1234).
3. Select the **Setup Wizard**.
| |
|:------------------------------------------|
| 
| | Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen | **Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:** 1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50. 2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it. 3. Select Print Server. 4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch. **Once you have the Setup Wizard open:** 1. Click on **Printer Configuration**. 2. Click on **Add Printer**. 3. In the menu at the right, select **Windows Printer**. 4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“Express”**, or any name you wish to use. 5. Click the **Add** button. 6. Click on the newly created **Windows Printer** Interface option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface. **Windows Printer Interface General Settings:** - **Printer Name:** Select the Windows printer driver name desired from the drop- down menu. - **Band Output:** This feature sends blocks of lines to be printed to the Windows spooler, which results in faster printing, especially for enlargements. This should only be set to **True** for large format printers. - **Rotate Variable Length:** This will rotate the image to save on paper usage. This should only be set to true for large format printers. - **Reprint photo on error:** The option should only be set to True when using Mitsubishi printers. The default value is false. - **Continue Job After Item Failure:** If this option is set to True, the APM software will continue printing the current job in the event of any unexpected printer error. The default value is false. - **Debug Mode:** If after changing all of the settings the Windows Printer interface does not work, come back into this screen and set this to **True**. The default value is false. **Border Alignment Settings:** Settings in the Border Alignment section are not typically used unless additional border space is needed on one or more sides. This is due to the fact that border alignment problems are best resolved by manually adjusting the position of the paper roll/ink ribbon inside the printer. However, if the issue still persists after the manual re-adjustment of the paper roll/ink ribbon, you can specify values in the following fields to adjust the borders. (The default values are **0in**). - **Left Border Adjustment:** Adjust the left border by entering positive numbers to shift the border to the right; negative numbers to shift it to the left. - **Right Border Adjustment:** Adjust the right border by entering positive numbers to shift the border to the right; negative numbers to shift it to the left. - **Top Border Adjustment:** Adjust the bottom border by entering positive numbers to shift the border down ; negative numbers to shift it up. - **Bottom Border Adjustment:** Adjust the left border by entering positive numbers to shift the border up; negative numbers to shift it down. \*\***Note:** Images will be moved but not resized. You must use Lucidiom’s length notation, which is either 1000 x inches or 100 x mm. Example: 4000in is 4 inches, 15000mm is 15 cm. - **Printer DPI** can be changed to a higher or lower value depending on the configuration of the printer, but by default it is set to **300**. | | |:-------------------------------------| | 
| | Windows Printer Interface | --- ## Windows Printer The Windows Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to print orders generated from an APM to a printer(s) that are setup using a Windows driver. ### Prerequisites 1. The Windows driver for the printer needs to be properly installed and configured to print the correct size on the APM if the APM is to print locally or it should be installed on the machine running Lab 50 if that program is being used to manage the orders for printing. 2. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot on below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard. | | |:----------------------------| |  | | Print Settings | ### Setting Up a Windows Printer Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Windows Printer Interface. **This process includes the following steps:** 1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings. 2. Assigning printable products to the interface. --- ## Zoom Album Configuration and Printer Setup To configure the zoom album product, you will need to begin by adding the product to your current fulfillment offerings. In the Setup Wizard, you will need to click on the fulfillment for which you wish to offer the zoom album product, enter a price, and then in the box at the bottom of the product screen, you will need to change the output type to jpeg. For zoom albums and zoom album covers, this should always be set to jpg. For the printer configuration, you will want to visit the manufacturer's website to get the latest and greatest driver software for your printer model. This driver should be installed on whatever machine will be directly handling the printing of the zoom album, so it may be the kiosk or lab 50. There should be two instances of the drivers installed in windows if you are going to be offering the zoom covers in addition to the zoom album. One driver instance should be configured for each product, and it may be helpful to name the printer according to which product it will be printing ie. the "ZoomCover" printer will be configured for printing the zoom cover product. The drivers should be configured as follows: Zoom Album Pages: Legal Size Paper Glossy Photo Paper Paper Source - Auto-Sheet Feeder Zoom Album Cover Sticker: 4.5x7.75 Custom Paper Size Glossy Photo Paper Paper Source - Cassette Once you have the two printer instances added, you will need to go into the Setup Wizard and configure two windows printers - one for the zoom album pages and one for the zoom covers. Once they have been added, assign the products via products printed here and the product matrix to the appropriate printer, and you'll be all set. --- ## Message Customization and Localization While the vast majority of the Photo Finale platform is localized into a variety of languages, there are a limited number of strings that default to English but can be customized on a per-dealer basis by request through our support team. The following messages can be overridden to provide localization for a dealer's primary language, or simply customization to better reflect their brand. ### Customizable Messages | Name | Description | Default | |:-----------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------|:---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | mobile\_notification\_msg\_order\_shipped | SMS text when a mail order is marked complete | Your order #\{%order\_number%\} from \{%dealer\_name%\} has been shipped. Keep an eye on your mailbox! | | mobile\_notification\_msg\_order\_ready\_for\_pickup | SMS text when a pickup order is marked complete | Your order from \{%dealer\_name%\} (#\{%order\_number%\}) is now ready for pickup at \{%store\_name%\}. | | stripe\_charge\_description\_v2 | Transaction description for Stripe payments | \{%dealer\_name%\} Order #\{%order\_number%\} | --- ## Coupons and Promos *Learn how to set up coupons and promos in myLab and Lab 50, including product tagging, coupon codes, and campaign creation.* You will need myLab and Lab 50 to set up a promo.
This is done in myLab: [mylab.photofinale.com](http://mylab.photofinale.com)
Product tags are a great way to set up a promo. In myLab, go to Store Mgmt > Product Tags and set up or view a tag...add/remove products as needed. You can then base your promo off of this tag.
Product Tags can be used in the Conditions or Awards requirements. More here: [Product Tags](/mylab/product-tags)
If you want your promo to use one, this is done in the Lab 50 order management software.
Not all promos need to require a code. If you don't need one, skip this step.
Open Lab 50 to Store Mgmt > Coupons and add a new one.
**Multi-Use Coupon** is used to create a single coupon code that may be used multiple times by multiple customers. You can specify the maximum number of times a coupon may be used, or you can specify that the coupon should expire at a given point in time.
**Coupon Campaign** allows you to generate multiple single-use coupon codes.
#### Adding/Editing a New/Existing coupon
1. To create or edit an existing coupon, access **Store Management** > **Coupons**.
2. Click on the *Create a new coupon* option on the left panel or select to edit an existing coupon by double-clicking on it.
3. Select the type of coupon you would like to create. Your options are *Multi-Use Coupon* or *Coupon Campaign*.
#### For Multi-Use Coupons
1. Fill in the fields with the necessary information. These include the following:
- **Enabled:** Mark the coupon as Active.
- **Code:** Enter the code you will require the customer to enter to receive the discount. It may use all letters, all numbers, or a combination of both up to 10 characters.
- **Description:** Description of the coupon, viewable only in Lab 50.
- **Limit:** Specify the number of times a coupon can be used, or select unlimited.
- **Unlimited:** Check the box if you want to allow unlimited use by the customer.
If you would like for this coupon to be accessible on the kiosk, the EQ Connections options must be setup to synchronize the setup, and the coupon code must use *numbers* only.
2. When complete, click on **Save** on the left.
#### For Coupon Campaigns
1. Fill in the fields with the necessary information. These include the following:
- **Enabled:** Mark the coupon as Active.
- **New Coupon Campaign Name:** Name for the new coupon campaign, viewable only in Lab 50.
- **Description:** Description of the coupon, viewable only in Lab 50.
2. In the box labeled *Coupon Codes*, you have two options for generating single-use coupon codes.
- **Generate Codes:** This option will open a dialogue box to walk you through specifying the number of coupon codes, number of characters in the coupon code, coupon prefix, and coupon suffix to use for code generation.
- **Import codes from a file:** This option will allow you to import a text file listing coupon codes. The text file must list each code as a separate line within the file, and line breaks should be used to differentiate between codes rather than commas or semicolons.
Example: The text below would generate two individual coupon codes.
```
12345
67890
```
**To generate coupon codes using Lab 50:**
1. Select the *Generate Codes* option from within the *Create a new coupon* window for *Coupon Campaign* setup.
2. Complete the required fields to generate your codes. The fields include the following:
- **Prefix:** The prefix to use for the coupon code. This field is alpha-numeric and limited to four characters.
- **Length:** The number of digits to use between the prefix and suffix. This value does NOT include the prefix and suffix in the character count. The maximum value is 10.
- **Suffix:** The suffix to use for the coupon code. This field is alpha-numeric and limited to four characters.
- **Count:** The number of coupon codes to create.
3. Once you have completed the required fields, the *Example:* box will generate a preview as well as update the count for *Maximum codes:* that can be generated using the options you have selected. Once you have verified the settings, press the **Generate** button, and the *Status:* window will update dynamically. Please note the longer the code and/or the more codes you need generated will affect the amount of time it takes for the codes to be ready.
4. Once the codes are generated, a dialogue window will prompt you to save the codes as a text file. The file name will default to **promo-***PrefixvalueCharcountSuffixvalue*. In the screenshot example on the right, the default file name was promo-LS20601.txt.
We recommend saving this file for your records. Codes cannot be reviewed in Lab 50.
This is done in Lab 50: **Store Management** > **Product Discounts and Promotions**.
Click on *Create a new discount* option (or find an existing promo and copy). Go through each tab and fill out. Then save. Details below on each tab...
**General** (the details)
- Name character limit is 30 characters.
- Dates are east coast time zone...for other time zones, you will need to convert.
- Number of times applied per order - if you have 25% off mugs...should this apply off every mug (leave unchecked) in the cart or only one (check and set limit)?
- Number of times per customer - system uses email on the order to determine usage
**Conditions** (what user has to do in order to get the discount)
- If a code needs to entered to get the promo, tick Enter Coupon and find your code (you would need to create this already, see the coupon code step above)
- If the code takes a % off or gives a price, or if you just have a straight sale on a product without a code, there's no "Buy" condition needed. The time a Buy condition would be needed is if it's a "Buy One, Get One" or "Buy 50 and get whatever" scenario.
- If the Buy condition is off a Product, it's only off of ONE product ID. Click Select a Product...it takes a while to open, then find your product.
**Award** (what the user gets once prereqs are met)
- To have "free shipping" be the award, you have to have shipping set up, and it will take your standard shipping off.
- Order subtotals set to 100% off are still used to calculate your revenue share commission. If you need to use a 100% coupon to test, let us know the order number and we can remove the order from the rev share calc.
- Order subtotal and product discount will be stacked, since they are two discount types. If you want to have them not stacked, so only the better applies, create an "all products" tag and set up a promo that gives a product discount on items tagged "all products"...that way only one product discount will apply.
- If your tag is not showing in the list, pick a different one for now, then close/open Lab 50 and return to select the tag you need.
- Same as with the Buy, if you are doing it by Product ID, that window takes a while to open. You can tag just one product too...it's a quicker, more flexible way to set it up.
- Include/exclude may not seem right...switch off and on this tab so it can load the settings to enable that option based on what you have entered.
## Multiple Coupons
You can have the following discounts on a single order:
- 1 order-level discount
- 1 free-shipping discount
- 1 tax-exemption discount
- 1 product-level discount *per product*
If a customer ordered a 4x6, 5x7, and 8x10 for home delivery, theoretically they could have 6 separate discount active (3 higher-level discounts & 3 product discounts).
For each of those "discountable entities", the engine will pick the best available discount.
**Examples**:
1. If a customer enters a coupon code that activates a "20% off prints" discount, and the dealer also has an automatic "25% off 4x6 on Mondays" discount, then the 25% discount will apply to the 4x6 and the 20% will apply to the 5x7 and 8x10.
2. If there is a promo for 10% off banners and another promo for 10% off the whole order, first the 10% would be taken off of the banner, then order totaled and 10% taken from that subtotal.
3. If there is a promo for $5 off a mug and 20% off the order, first the $5 would be taken off the mug price, then 20% would be taken off the order total.
4. If there is a promo for 10% off the order and 25% off the order, only the 25% off would apply, as the system will choose the best offer.
5. If there is a promo for $2 off 8x10 print and $3 off 8x10 print, only the $3 off coupon would be applied.
6. If there is a promo for $2 off a 11x8.5 book with a price of $20 and another promo for $50% off that same book, the book would be $10 as only the 50% coupon would be applied as just 1 product-level discount is applied.
**Option to restrict to one code per order:** Dealers who want to limit customers to being able to enter only one coupon code per order can contact support to enable that option. (Once the user enters one code, the button to enter more is removed...so if you have a code for mugs and a code for canvas and the customer orders both products, they can only enter one of those promotions.) However, even with the single-coupon setting, there could still be multiple discounts applied to an order depending upon a dealer's configuration since a) not all discounts require a coupon, and b) a single coupon code can activate multiple discounts. Also, please note that the Pocket Pics iPhone app only allows one code to be entered, regardless of this setting.
## Helpful Tips
1. **Where to set up:** Coupons and Promos can **only be set up in Lab 50.**
2. **In a nutshell:** Your sale can require user to enter a code OR, it can be based on what they purchase, with no need to enter a code. Most dealers require a code...to set this up, go to Store Mgmt > Coupons and define your code. Then go to Store Mgmt > Product discounts and promos and set your requirements (the conditions that need to be met, and the award once those conditions are met) for the promo.
3. **Multi-use coupons vs campaign:** When creating your coupon code, most of the time you will create a **Multi-use** coupon. A Campaign would be for something like a Groupon, where the user essentially buys a unique code.
4. **Unlimited coupons:** After you choose your type of coupon, you have the option to limit its use–this means limit the total number of times that code can be used overall...not per user. Most of the promos dealers use are set to **Unlimited.** Limiting the coupon would come into play for a promo where you are offering it to the first X people. "Free mug to the first 100 people to place orders" (limit=100). Or, if you want to test or give a "10 free whatevers" to someone... limiting use to an exact number will ensure the code can't be misused. There are other ways in the Promo section to limit coupon use (such as by date, by members-only, by day, and of course by what the coupon is valid for).
5. **Set valid dates:** You will need to set a start and end date for the discount...this means you can set up your promos in advance! Or, you can easily resurrect a coupon from the past by adjusting dates.
6. **Product tags:** When you set up the Conditions and Award, Product Tags are super helpful. We have set up a number of them (which you should check before using) but you can set up your own! To set these up, go into myLab and Store Mgmt > Product Tags. You create your own tag, then add the products that you want to be part of that group. Then, you can base your discount on that tag.
Once you have added products to the product tag, ensure that the product cache is flushed by making a data change to any product. The change can be to any product, it does not need to be one of the products you've added to the new product tag. The simplest thing to do is just go into any product and add a space to the end of the description and then save it. If, when you return to Lab 50 and the tag you set up in myLab is not showing for selection in Lab 50, close Lab 50 and delete your Temp folder (located here... C:\Program Files (x86)\Lucidiom Lab 50\) then restart Lab 50.
7. **Include vs exclude:** In the Awards tab, when you have the same product as the requirement (condition) and the award, you get this choice... Exclude is ticked by default, and SOMETIMES the Include is greyed out. If it's grey and you want to choose it, save your promo, then reopen and it will be available.
## Promote!
Include the coupon code in the link to the product group. Read here for how to do it: [https://www.photofinale.com/linked-coupon-codes/](https://www.photofinale.com/linked-coupon-codes/)
## FAQ
No. Not unless you want your most expensive gift to be the free one. The system works off the logic that the better promo takes precedence.
Yes. But please send ALL the details.
With the exception of 100% off promos, we calculate our rev share % AFTER discount is applied.
---
## Creating memberships
Membership Plans allow you to reward your loyal customer base by providing one or more different membership levels that can include special purchase plans, discounts, product credits and other benefits. Membership Plans, like products, can be sold to customers.
To setup a new membership within Lab 50, please follow these steps:
1. Access **Store Management** > **Product Catalog** and click on the **New** button.
2. For the product type, select *Membership Plan* and enter the name of the membership plan and description as you would like them to appear on your website.
3. Lab 50 will then open to the editing options for membership plans. The **General** tab gives you the option to change pricing, description, storage space, number of albums, whether or not the membership is active, and whether the membership is in-store only or purchaseable. The options are detailed below:
- **Name:** The name of the membership plan.
- **Description:** A brief description of the membership plan. This text will appear on your Photo Finale website beneath the membership name.
- **Price:** Price of Membership... to have a Free membership, use 0.00 as the price, and it will say "free" on the site
- **Albums:** Number of albums the member can create. If you want to have unlimited, enter 0.
- **Months:** Number of months the membership is valid.
- **Never Ends:** Check this option for a membership to never expire.
- **Allow customer to purchase:** Select to allow the membership plan to be offered and purchased by customers.
- **This is an instore only membership:** Use for private memberships not available to the general public.
- **Membership requires a Coupon:** This type of membership requires a coupon code to be entered.
- **Usage Limit > Limit Storage:** This is the critical limit, set it appropriately for priced membership. Average photo is 750k - 3.5 MB per photo.
- **Enabled:** Mark membership as active to activate the plan.
4. The **Promotions** tab allows you to specify a free product, pre-paid purchase plan, or discount to be included with the membership, and it displays the option to enable watermarks for photos.
- **Include a product:** Choose any product to be included with the membership. Click the browse button to choose the product to include.
- **Include a pre-paid purchase plan:** Choose a pre-paid plan to be included with this membership.
- **Include a discount:** Choose any discount to be included with this membership.
- **Allow online photos to have a dynamic watermark:** Default value is off, check it to allow watermarking of shared photos.
5. Lastly, the **Email Notifications** tab allows you to specify a welcome message to be sent to the customer when they register for a membership plan as well as an expiration notice. You can specify different messages based on whether the membership was ordered online or instore at a kiosk, and you can define expiration messages and the timeframe in which they should be sent to customers.
- **Welcome message from Photo Finale Web:** Using the drop-down menu, select an email message for customers purchasing memberships online.
- **Welcome message from a kiosk:** Using the drop-down menu, select an email message for customers purchasing memberships on a kiosk in-store.
- **Expiration Message:** Add, Edit, or Remove an Expiration Message to be sent to customers as a reminder for membership
renewal.
- When complete, click on the *Save Changes* option on the left panel.
---
## Setting up Free Prints with Membership
*Learn how to set up free prints as a membership incentive in Lab 50 by creating a pre-paid purchase plan and linking it to your plan.*
Many retailers like to add a free product as an incentive to join. Here is how you add 10 free prints for new members:
1. In Lab 50, go to **Store Management > Product Catalog**. Click on **Purchase Plans**
2. Make a new one (the +New button is above the yellow folder list) with your free products and set the price to $0. Make sure the "Allow customers to purchase this plan" is not checked. **Save.**
(Note, you can make other pre-paid plans that customers can buy too... a nice way to sell some products up-front!)
3. Back in the yellow folder list, go into **Membership Plans.** If you already have your membership plan set up, open it...if not, create one.
4. Under the **Promotions** tab, check the "Include a pre-paid plan" box, and select the plan you created. **Save.** This gives the customer a credit in their account for 10 free prints...next time they order, their first 10 4x6s will be free!
You can have different types of memberships and different promos associated with them...get creative!
---
## Adding merchandise and service (non-photo) products
*Learn how to add merchandise and service products in Lab 50's Product Catalog, from creation to assigning them to categories for your site.*
1. In Lab 50, go to Store Management > Product Catalog.
2. Click on "+ New" in the toolbar.
3. Select "Merchandise and Services" from the list of types.
4. Enter the product's name, description (optional) and price.
5. Enter a product ID: use a number in the 9xxx range to ensure it's not being used by another product
6. Enter the rest of the product details (UPC, price tiers , etc).
7. Hit "Edit the preview photo" in the sidebar and upload the product icon (recommended 700x700).
8. Hit "Save changes" in the sidebar to save and create the product.
9. Right click on a category in your product catalog and select "Add Products...". When the Browse for Product dialog appears, navigate to All Products > Merchandise and select the new product(s) you created.
10. Wait 20 minutes and then test on your site. This is how long it generally takes the cache to clear and the site data to refresh.
---
## Creating custom print products
*Learn how to create custom print products in Lab 50 by setting size, price, and product ID details for accurate catalog fulfillment.*
We have a ton of print products in the library. If the name doesn't exactly match, you can edit it to what you need. It is the size that is the important part. If you do not find the size you need, then you can create your own custom print product. To do this...
**Video tutorial:**
**Another video:**
**Directions in screenshot form:**
In Lab 50, go to Store Management > Product Catalog. Click on the "New" button.
Choose **Prints** and fill in the details.
For print products:
- Name/Description: Make sure you fill in a consistent name, and a good description (do not just copy the name). Descriptions are used in the Search feature, along with the product name.
- Product ID: Use a number in **9000-9999** range, which is the bracket we have reserved for client use. **It is important that numbers are not duplicated.**
- Enter price, dimensions of the output and paper finish if needed.
- Fulfillment for locally printed products should be set to Print Server
- Weight is used (optionally) for shipping
- The DPI value is not used, as we now send across the highest available image for printing.
- UPC is for your internal use.
After defining your new product, then navigate to the catalog and group where you want the product to show up and click Add Products, and select your new product.
To route your custom product for printing: [Routing custom products](/store-setup/creating-your-own-products/routing-custom-products)
---
## Creating template-based products based off existing products (duplicating)
*Learn how to create template-based products by duplicating existing products in Lab 50, including retailer setup and Photo Finale support steps.*
### Overview
You may need a product that uses content available from another product... such as, you have 5x7 flat cards enabled, but would like to offer them printed on cardstock at a premium price.
### 1) The Retailer-Side Setup
Example of when you need this: You want to offer cards that are different stock paper and at a different price but have them show all the Standard and IPI content! OK!
To be able to offer the same product (type/size) but alternate surfaces (and prices) online--- (no kiosk equivalent at the moment for this)
1. In Lab 50 or myLab, look up the folio product you want to duplicate (like 5x7 flat card), jot down the Product ID.
2. Create a new product (push Create New Product btn in upper left of Lab 50; **ensure to set the 'Product Type' to be the same as the existing product**) and in the Product ID box (green), copy in that Product ID from step 1.
3. If you need it to print to a different channel or have different production settings than the originating product ID does, then assign a different ID for printing (yellow box). Use an ID in the 9000 - 9999 range, which are reserved for custom dealer products that we do not need to assign/reserve/be notified of. Pick an ID within that range and go with it (record what you are using so you don’t duplicate it later). You will need to add the product to your apmconfig\_products\_custom.xml file and then configure it for printing in the Setup Wizard. (instructions follow)\*\*
4. (Otherwise the ID from the green box will be used for printing---which is already a product so that is already in your products xml file, which tells the system where to print the product... this is fine if it prints to the same place the original one does.)
5. Once you add your product, it's added to the All Products folder. Now, find the category where this new product should go(this would be in the folder with the small blue check mark icon), right-click and Add Product, then go find you new product. To zero in on it faster, check the Recents folder or the group where you put it when you defined it.
### 2) The Photo Finale Support Side Setup
When you have the products set how you'd like, let us know (support@photofinale.com). We have to run some magic on this side so that all the properties and content align properly. You may want to disable the products until we have done this part. Just tell us where the products are (please include the product ID) and we'll take care of the rest! If you'd like to screenshot the list from myLab that shows the 3 IDs and product names and all...that would be helpful.
### How to print these products:
See: [Routing custom products](/store-setup/creating-your-own-products/routing-custom-products)
---
## Creating your own products
*Learn how to create custom print, merchandise, and service products, plus route their printing by ID for your own store setup.*
##### Adding/creating
1. **Prints -** You can create your own print products: See [Creating custom print products](/store-setup/creating-your-own-products/creating-custom-print-products)
2. **Merchandise & Services -** You can create your own merchandise or service products: See [Adding merchandise and service (non-photo) products](/store-setup/creating-your-own-products/adding-merchandise-and-service-non-photo-products)
3. **Creative** - You can...
1. **Repurpose:** Use something that exists but rename it and change the image. Aspect is what you need to use as your guide. If you want a 15x10" puzzle... but that is not a product, you can add an **unused** 15x10 Aluminum Panel and rename it, change description, change product preview image... and that is now a puzzle.
2. **Duplicate:** You cannot add a second copy of a product and rename it... the products share properties and this won't work how you will need it to. If you need a copy of a product, for example... you offer a 5x7 glossy card and you want to offer also a 5x7 sparkle paper card ... so you want all the same templates for both, but you want to price and describe them differently, then we need to duplicate it for you. Let us know what to copy and what you want to call it and we can do it for you. You can do a step of this on your own, then we will link up the templates, but it's just as easy for us to do it all in one step. [support@photofinale.com](mailto:support@photofinale.com) ( Leaving this page here for you in case you go this route: [Creating template-based products based off existing products (duplicating)](/store-setup/creating-your-own-products/duplicating-existing-products) )
3. **Brand new**: contact us, [support@photofinale.com](mailto:support@photofinale.com) for info and pricing.
##### Printing/routing
Then, the printing of those custom products. If you do nothing, the new products will go to the hotfolder. But if you want to route them based on their ID, like you might do for standard products, then this is the info you want: [Routing custom products](/store-setup/creating-your-own-products/routing-custom-products)
---
## Routing custom products
*Learn how to route custom products in Lab 50 by editing apmconfig_products_custom.xml and configuring settings via the Setup Wizard.*
New products will default to use the Hotfolder driver for printing. If you would like to route them differently, you will need to add the products to your apmconfig\_products\_custom.xml file on Lab 50, then use the Setup Wizard on Lab 50 to configure routing. To configure this file...
1. In Notepad (or better, Notepad++), open apmconfig\_products\_custom.xml (located in C:\Program Files\Lucidiom Lab 50\Tools\PrintServer). If this file does not yet exist, open a new file, and from apmconfig\_products.xml, copy top two lines of the apmconfig\_products.xml and the bottom line into a new xml file and save it as apmconfig\_products\_custom.xml. It will look like this (the order of the items doesn't matter. To check that you didn't screw up something, you should be able to open this file in a browser...if you have made any mistakes in syntax or formatting, it will show you where to fix.:
Print product:
```xml
```
Creative products
```xml
```
2. Replace the ID and position code with the same product ID used for your product. If you are using a duplicated product ID, you should instead use the Fulfillment ID field which will serve as a fake Product ID for the purposes of fulfillment. You should use a unique number in the 9000-9999 block. The product ID and position code should use the same number. Don’t repeat a number you have already used.
3. Save as apmconfig\_products\_custom.xml in the same folder location where the apmconfig\_products.xml is located, which for a Lab 50 machine is C:\Program Files\Lucidiom Lab 50\Tools\PrintServer
4. Configure as needed in Lab 50's Setup Wizard. (Settings > Fulfillment > Print Server)
---
## Adding creative (photo or template-based) products
##### Adding the products to your catalog using myLab:
In myLab, navigate to the category or subcategory where you want the product and click Add Products...search for the product(s) to add and check the box–find and select repeatedly until you have all the products you want, then click the Add button. If you miss one, go back through Product Catalog back to your category and click Add Products again, otherwise the first batch you add will get added again (if this happens, you can just delete by clicking the X next to each).
##### How to find products to add
Search in myLab or, for a list with product dimensions and thumbnails, use this list (copy the product ID and use that in myLab) [https://](https://secure.photofinale.com/support/marketing/productlist/MasterProductList.htm)[secure.photofinale.com/support/marketing/productlist/MasterProductList.htm](http://secure.photofinale.com/support/marketing/productlist/MasterProductList.htm)
##### [Demo: How to add a product in myLab](http://secure.photofinale.com/support/marketing/productlist/MasterProductList.htm)
##### [Demo: How to change fulfillment of a product in myLab (hint: technically you are removing the supplier's product and adding a different one)](http://secure.photofinale.com/support/marketing/productlist/MasterProductList.htm)
##### [Demo: (another example of the above)](http://secure.photofinale.com/support/marketing/productlist/MasterProductList.htm)
##### Adding products using Lab 50:
This method is a bit slower and requires 2 steps: enabling, then adding.
**There is one circumstance where you should use Lab 50 instead of myLab...and that is if you first offered a product as third-party fulfilled, but have decided instead to print it in-house.** If you try to just add the "Print Server" or "IPI Content" (ie, locally fulfilled) product in myLab, the fulfiller will keep reverting to the third party. The solution is to use Lab 50 and enable the product. Then, you can ADD that product to the desired category using either Lab 50 or myLab.
1. Click on **Store Management** > **Product Catalog**.
2. Select the *"All Products"* folder at the top of the list on the left panel.
3. For each product you would like to offer, highlight the product in the list on the right panel by left-clicking on it (\*CTRL click to select multiples).
4. Right-click on the highlighted line and choose *Enable the selected product*. You will see a green light to indicate it is enabled.
5. In Lab 50, right-click the category or subcategory where you want the product and click Add Product...wait for the popup, then check the product(s) to add.
---
## Adding IPI Content or Shared Content
*Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > Adding Products to Your PF Site > Adding creative (photo or template-based) products%20products.md)*
Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > [Adding Products to Your PF Site](/store-setup/adding-products-to-your-pf-site) > [Adding creative (photo or template-based) products](..\Adding%20creative%20(photo%20or%20template-based)%20products.md)
IPI Content is meant to be locally fulfilled. 3rd party products from our [Marketplace partners](https://www.photofinale.com/partner-programs/marketplace/) will be fulfilled at their facility.
##### Verifying that IPI Content is Being Offered on Your Site
In myLab, look at your product list. Under fulfillment...
- IPI Content – means the IPI Content (as well as PF standard content) is showing for that product.
- PrintServer – then that is showing only our standard content. (Dealers who have had our software for a long time may also see EQ Content, this stuff comes to you locally as well)
- Another name - this means it's a 3rd party fulfilled product
In Lab 50, just to keep you on your toes, the IPI Content Fulfillment for both standard-only and standard+IPI designs will say Print Server.
- Blue text - indicates that it is locally-fulfilled supplier (IPI in this case) content. (+ PF standard content)
- Black text - indicates that only PF standard content is shown for that product
- Green text - indicates this it a third-part fulfilled product
##### Adding IPI Content
To offer the IPI content, we need to give you access to that catalog. To check if you have access:
In myLab, click Store Mgmt > Product Catalog and see what supplier partners you have listed.
In Lab 50, click Store Mgmt > Product Catalog and look under your Supplier Catalogs list in the left sidebar menu
To add products, myLab is quicker. Do this: click Add Products and search for a product, you will see it listed twice if there is IPI Content for it. You could see it more times if you have a supplier (3rd party) catalog enabled.
Like this card:.
- If you add the first one, labelled PRINTSERVER, then just the PF standard content will show.
- If you add the second one, labelled IPI Content, then when users click that item, both the PF standard AND the IPI Content will show.
- If you offer 3rd-party-fulfilled products, then that company's name will be listed, such as LA Cameras, PF-Prestige Fulfillment, Unforgettable Memories, etc.
- There is no reason to add more than one of the same product to your site.
- If you have a product on your site that is showing "Print Server" (myLab) (or black text in Lab 50), and you know there is IPI content for it, then add the IPI Content version of the product and remove the Print Server version. There is no way to "switch" it.
##### What Products Does IPI Offer Designs For?
You can browse the products here: [https://](https://ipi.photofinale.com/create)[ipi.photofinale.com/create](http://ipi.photofinale.com/create)
Newer products have the Product ID as part of the name, so you can add it easily. Older ones have not been renamed. To grab the exact product ID to use in your catalog setup, you can:
Go here: [https://ipi.photofinale.com/debugsettings](https://ipi.photofinale.com/debugsettings) and check the box and Apply.
Then click CREATE and navigate to the product you need.
Jot down the APM ID number... this is the PRODUCT ID that you will search for in myLab to find that exact product. Searching by name will also work, but the product ID is exact.
---
## Adding Wholesale-Filled (Supplier/Outlabbed) Products
*Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > Adding Products to Your PF Site > Adding creative (photo or template-based) products%20products.md)*
Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > [Adding Products to Your PF Site](/store-setup/adding-products-to-your-pf-site) > [Adding creative (photo or template-based) products](..\Adding%20creative%20(photo%20or%20template-based)%20products.md)
# How to Incorporate Supplier Products Into Your Existing PF Catalog
**Use myLab:**
**Dealers, please:**
1. Make sure you check your prices and make sure your shipping costs are covered (either with your own shipping costs, or built into the product)
2. If you see any products with "TEMP. SUPPLIER UNAVAILABILITY" at the end of the name, you may add these but please make sure they are disabled. We will enable them again when we receive notice from the supplier that they are available to sell again.
---
## Adding and Configuring Localized Folio Products Through Lab 50
*Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > Adding Products to Your PF Site > Adding creative (photo or template-based) products%20products.md)*
Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > [Adding Products to Your PF Site](/store-setup/adding-products-to-your-pf-site) > [Adding creative (photo or template-based) products](..\Adding%20creative%20(photo%20or%20template-based)%20products.md)
# Overview
For certain kinds of folio products there are unique product IDs in the Master catalog that that when enabled on a product Catalog in Lab 50 and/or installed on the kiosk through the kiosk content installer overrides (please see Release notes for the content installers) show the localized content.
# Example of Adding French Canadian Content for the Web Through Lab 50
### Step 1: Enabling the French Canadian Content
1. Go into the Store management area
2. Find and enable the Following Product IDs in the ***All Product*** Master Catalog
##### Flat Cards (French Canadian)
- 4x8 FR-CA Flat Card, ID 3250992
- 5x7 FR-CA Flat Card, ID 3271993
- 7x5 FR-CA Flat Card, ID 3340994
- 8x4 FR-CA Flat Card, ID 3400995
### Step 2: Add Localized Products to the Web (Default) Catalog
1. Navigate to the web catalog
2. Under the desired category right click and select the option *Add Products*
**Adding Products**
For info on how to add products please refer to the following wiki page.:
**[[Adding and Enabling Products for Web]]**
### Step 3: Configuring the product to print
There are a couple ways to set this up based upon what other products of the same size are setup and configured to print.
#### Method 1: Using an Already Configured Product as Alternate Fulfillment ID Within the Product Settings.
1. Once the desired localized products have been added to the appropriate category, double click on the product to edit the product settings
2. Set the price
3. change the name and description as needed
4. Set the Render mode (JPEG or PDF)
5. under the ID Option tab, you can set it to send as existing product ID that is already configured. If there are other products and/or sizes that output as the same size and file type, then enter the Product ID in the *ID (optional)* field to help expedite the setup.
**Note on using the ID (Optional) field.**
If you enter an ID in the ID optional field, this assumes that the product ID entered is already setup fully in the setup wizard for the print server to print correctly. If there are no other products setup appropriately, then the product added needs to be setup in the setup wizard if the print server is to be used for fulfillment.
#### Method 2: Adding the Localized Product to Print- Complete Print Server Setup
1. Once the desired localized products have been added to the appropriate category, double click on the product to edit the product settings
2. Set the price
3. change the name and description as needed
4. Set the Render mode (JPEG or PDF)
5. Go to the Settings->Fulfillment->Print Server area
6. Click on the Setup Wizard
7. Add the same products you added in the Product Catalog to the Products Printed Here section
8. In the Product Matrix area, Assign the Products to the appropriate printer interface
9. If the printer interface requires mapping a specific product to a particular print channel, paper magazine, output folder, etc. Go into the printer interface and configure the product as necessary within the interface
**Configuring the Products to Print using the Print Server**
if there are no other similar products already setup, then it will be necessary to use the 2nd Method and completely setup the products within the Setup Wizard and within the particular Printer interface. Each printer interface has different settings.
For More information on setting products to print and on the settings for the printer interfaces please review the information here:
**General Printer Configuration:**
[[Chapter 8 - Printer Configuration]]
**Printer Interface Guide:**
[[Printer Interface Guide]]
---
## Creating default catalog and establishing categories
You may configure multiple product catalogs, but by default the products to be offered on the website will be polled from the default product catalog. The default catalog is denoted with a blue check mark icon, and it may or may not be named *Default*. For additional information on assigning catalogs to your Photo Finale website, please see the section on Application Settings in Chapter 3.
##### Adding a new catalog. This may be done in Lab 50 or myLab.
1. In either Lab 50 or myLab, go to **Store Management** > **Product Catalog** and select *Create a New Catalog*
2. Enter a name to identify this catalog, then press **Enter**.
3. Right-click on the new catalog, and select to create a new category, then enter a name for the category.
4. Continue to add Categories within the Catalog until you've created all of the category options you would like available for product groupings on your website.
\*\***Note:** You cannot add products to a catalog without first adding them to a category. To setup a catalog, you will need to first create the catalog, then create a category, and then select to add products within a category.
##### To add additional categories to the default catalog. This may be done in Lab 50 or myLab.
1. Right-click on the default catalog and select *"Create Category"*.
2. Type in a name for the new category, and press **Enter**.
3. Continue to add Categories within the Catalog until you've created all of the category options you would like available on the website.
##### Adding products to the default catalog. This may be done in Lab 50 or myLab.
Once all of your desired categories have been added, you'll need to add your web products to the default catalog.
1. Click the "+" sign next to the default catalog to expand the listing, if it is not already expanded.
2. Right-click on a desired category (for example, *"Standard"*) and choose *Add Products*.
3. A window will open displaying all products available to add to this category. Only products that have been enabled will be available to be added to the category.
4. Check the boxes for the desired products and click **OK**.
Once you have selected the products to add, you can change the price, description, fulfillment options etc. by double-clicking on a product to open it for editing.
When you have finished editing the product, click on **Save Changes** on the left panel to return to the catalog screen.
**Creating additional product catalogs**
You can create additional product catalogs to push remote pricing updates to your kiosks or to start setting up for a planned product offering change. This feature is often utilized by labs to change the products/pricing listed on the website for special promotions and then reverted back to the original information by simply changing which catalog is set as the default.
##### Catalog options
To view options available for customizing the default catalog, right-click on the catalog you wish to edit. The menu options are as follows:
- **Collapse:** The catalog menu will shrink to a single line entry in the product catalog window.
- **Set as Default Catalog:** Assigns the selected catalog as the preferred product listing for Photo Finale Web.
- **Create a new category:** Creates a new product group with the name you specify.
- **Sequence categories:** Opens a window to organize the categories available within the catalog. By default, categories are listed in the order in which they are added to the catalog.
- **Disable this catalog:** Deselects the catalog as the default.
- **Import:** Allows you to import a pre-defined product list from a third-party supplier or Lucidiom. Options within this section include the following:
- **From Template:** Imports a catalog of standard print products or prints and folio products created by Lucidiom. It includes the icons that are assigned to each product group on the APM and default recommended retail pricing.
- **From Supplier:** Imports a catalog of products from a third-party provider. These products may be produced in-house or re-routed to a production house depending on the catalog settings specified by the provider.
- **Delete:** Removes the catalog from the product catalog. This cannot be reversed.
- **Rename:** Renames the catalog.
**Category options.**
To view options available for customizing a category within a catalog, right-click on the category you wish to edit. The menu options are as follows:
- **Add Products:** Add products to be offered within the category.
- **Create a new category:** Create a new category within the category. This option is new with version 7.5 and is to mirror the product groupings available on the kiosk. Example: Housewares gift products divide into Mugs and Steins, Coasters, Plates, Kitchenware, and Magnets. These categories also divide into further groups such as Porcelain Plates and Character Plates.
- **Enabled/Disable this category:** Enables or disables the category on Photo Finale web. You can disable entire categories or sub-categories within a category.
- **Delete:** Removes the category or sub-category.
- **Rename:** Renames the category or sub-category within the catalog.
- **Options:** Opens a window to organize the products listed within the category. This window also provides a direct URL link to the category for use in linking Start Page ads, and it provides a means of adding/changing icons for individual sub-categories.
To change the icons associated with a category:
1. Right-click on the category for which you would like to add/change an icon.
2. Select the *Options* menu. The current icon, if one has been assigned, will appear in the preview window.
3. Click on the **Change Icon** button, and the Category Icon Selection screen will open. The options on the left panel do the following:
- **Default:** Displays Lucidiom default icon set. These icons match the icons used in the APM software.
- **Custom:** Displays any icons that have been uploaded to your account.
- **Upload:** Allows you to add a new icon to your custom library.
4. Once you have selected an icon, press the **OK** button.
\*\***Note:** If you hover over an icon, the full file name will be displayed.
---
## Product Options and Attributes
*Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > Adding Products to Your PF Site > Adding creative (photo or template-based) products%20products.md)*
Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > [Adding Products to Your PF Site](/store-setup/adding-products-to-your-pf-site) > [Adding creative (photo or template-based) products](..\Adding%20creative%20(photo%20or%20template-based)%20products.md)
In myLab navigate to Store Management > Product Catalogs and select your active product catalog. Access a category and then select a specific product.
You can offer some choices for users in a text input field or pulldown menu.
The user cannot place the order without making a selection or entering text, so make sure your directions and choices allow for this.
Pro tip: make sure to check off the ENABLED button for the option to show on the site. You cannot offer both types of personalization on a single product.
In myLab... you can have text input... click into the product and set:
it will look like this on the site...
Or, you can use the List of Options type... which looks like this in myLab
This is an example of how the list options will display on the website:
## Add Prices to Attributes
As of Nov 2017, you can now associate prices and fulfillment IDs [(use for routing in production)](/store-setup/creating-your-own-products/routing-custom-products).
If you do not put a price in the "Price Adjustment (Additional Units)" box then the price adjustment is only charged for the first unit and additional units charge the base price.
The point of having two separate fields for 1st Unit and Additional Units is to add flexibility and that would be shot if we automatically charged the same price for all units if a value is set in the "1st Unit" field. An example of where you might want to have a single upcharge fee that applies only once to the item, regardless of the quantity ordered, is a digital service like retouching. If it's $10 to hand-retouch an image, it doesn't make sense to charge the customer for each copy of the photo since the retouching is only being done once. In that case you'd have $10 in the 1st Unit field and leave Additional Units empty.
## Special Setting for Print Products
Instead of a price, you can put "-1" into the price field to denote the "default" option. For example a "Glossy" print surface. No charge and if a customer selects it the dealer won't get every item tagged as having a a product option; it's just treated as the default.
Another special note about prints. The Product Personalization workflow for Print products was revamped in PF 16.8.1. Previously, all print attributes were treated as upgrades and a customer was given a "No Upgrade" choice in addition to the configured personalization options. With the new release, dealers are free to use print attributes as a choice between equal options that may not necessarily be considered upgrades. Existing print products with a list-of-options personalization have a new "No Upgrade" item that has been added to the each list to maintain backwards compatibility. Dealers are free to use myLab to remove this option on any products where the customer is being presented a choice that should require a mandatory selection.
## How Those Attributes Come Through For Production
**Lab 50 Order Summary**
****
**Lab 50 Order Details**
****
**Printed Invoice**
****
**Print 50 Order Summary**
****
**Print 50 Order Details**
****
---
## Setting Bleed, Safe Zones, Warning Zones, Crop Zones
*Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > Adding Products to Your PF Site > Adding creative (photo or template-based) products%20products.md)*
Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > [Adding Products to Your PF Site](/store-setup/adding-products-to-your-pf-site) > [Adding creative (photo or template-based) products](..\Adding%20creative%20(photo%20or%20template-based)%20products.md)
Crop-guide markers which will be shown to customers in the Creative Product Builder to visually indicate where photos and text may be cut off at the edges of a product are known as "Safe Zone Guides" and can be configured in myLab. Safe Zone Guides are configured on a per-product basis, and allow for independent margins on each of the four sides of the product, allowing for full customization.
The configuration in myLab is specified in percentage terms, with myLab instantly calculating the resulting dimension. The optional message for each guide is also configurable.
Two different visual styles of guides are provided which may be used independently or combined in a given product.
The **Warning Zone** style provides a dotted line with optional message at the bottom:
The **Danger Zone** style provides a semi-opaque red region with optional message contained within:
Or both styles can be combined in a single product:
---
## Tweaking Products to Fit Your Needs
*Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > Adding Products to Your PF Site > Adding creative (photo or template-based) products%20products.md)*
Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > [Adding Products to Your PF Site](/store-setup/adding-products-to-your-pf-site) > [Adding creative (photo or template-based) products](..\Adding%20creative%20(photo%20or%20template-based)%20products.md)
Can't find exactly the product you need?
**Search Tips:**
1. Do a search in myLab (try by name, size, partial name or even blanks manufacturer–like 'unisub')
2. Try our [master product list](https://secure.photofinale.com/support/marketing/productlist/MasterProductList.htm) (this is a point-in-time list, new products may not have been added yet)
**Adjustments:**
1. If you don't find something exactly the same, look for something that is the size (or aspect) you need. You can rename any product, and change the image and description associated with that product... in effect, converting it into what you need. For prints, you just need to make sure it's the right size, and that you aren't using it elsewhere on your site. Same thing for creative products, but additionally, you will want to add it to your site and try it first, to check that the styles offered make sense for your product.
2. Add/adjust the safe and danger zones for that product. You can edit the labels, so perhaps for your product "trim area" or "wrapped edge" makes more sense. Remember, the output size/aspect is what is important, along with how the product is presented on the site. The icons/thumbs you can adjust, but the styles and layout you cannot. Safe zones are adjusted per-product in myLab.
3. Add the product to your Folio Rendering file in order to tweak the output dimensions or placement on the output "canvas". This files is called apmconfig\_folio\_rendering.xml and is located in the Lab 50 computer here: **C:\Program Files (x86)\Lucidiom Lab 50\Tools\FolioServer** You can sometimes get away with a slight adjustment to the aspect, but this is helpful if you need to print the output in the middle of a blank sheet for product purposes. For the "target products" make sure to use the Product ID, unless you have set a fulfillment ID, then use the Fulfillment ID.
4. Contact support. We can duplicate products, and adjust min/max pages, and some output details, to suit many needs. We can also help you find a product and in some cases, create a new master product for you to use.
****
---
## Using the Folio Rendering XML to resize output
*Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > Adding Products to Your PF Site > Adding creative (photo or template-based) products%20products.md)*
Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > [Adding Products to Your PF Site](/store-setup/adding-products-to-your-pf-site) > [Adding creative (photo or template-based) products](..\Adding%20creative%20(photo%20or%20template-based)%20products.md)
The apmconfig\_folio\_rendering.xml file allow a dealer to resize folio output after it has been rendered. It supports several use cases:
### XML Spec
A folio rendering XML entry looks like:
```xml
Adult T-shirt, Vertical Image
10500in
13500in
1875in
0in
10125in
13500in
7009980
7009981
7009982
7009983
7009984
```
### XML Element Descriptions
| Node | Description |
|:---------------------------------|:---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| <name> | This is only used for the SetupWizard UI. |
| <output\_width> <output\_height> | This is the desired output size. (The right-hand image in the mockups above.) |
| <placement> | This is where the source image should be drawn on the destination page. (The red dotted line on the right-hand side in the mockups above.) |
| <source> | ***Optional***. The <source> section specifies the area of the source rendering that is copied. (The red dotted line on the left-hand side in mockup #3 above.) It is only used for scenario #3 pictured above. If no <source> node is specified, the rendering assumes the full source page should be used by default. |
| <target\_products> | This specifies one or more Product IDs for which the rendering should apply. |
### File Info
This file is called: **apmconfig\_folio\_rendering.xml** and is located (or can be added to): C:\Program Files (x86)\Photo Finale Print 50\Tools\FolioServer
### Examples
```xml
11oz White Ceramic Mug
8000in
3500in
0in
0in
8000in
3500in
8014663
```
---
## Editing Email Messages
*Configure the automated emails Lab 50 sends for events like order confirmation, shipping, and membership sign-up.*
## Overview
Lab 50 allows you to setup and configure several emails that are sent automatically as triggered by certain events such as membership sign-up or order completion.
These email templates are highly customizable and are often used to relay information to the customer such as order number, estimated pick-up/shipping time, and the store hours.
### Your Logo in the Template/Default Emails
Our templates use a macro for the logo. This logo is 364x72 jpg and you set in Lab 50's Brand Settings > Header Logo. If you try an email and your logo is not right, unless you have coded the html to point elsewhere... that is where you should change it.
### Editing Existing Messages and Adding New Options
Make the necessary changes to an existing message, or enter the information for a new message. You can right-click in the *"Body"* field for the email and select *Insert Macro* to access a list of available macros to insert into the email such as customer name.
Go to **Store Management** > **Email Messages and Customer Communication**.
Click on ***Create a new email message*** on the left panel, or double-click on an existing message to edit it.
Make changes then once complete, click on ***Save changes*** on the left panel.
**Additional Information on the "From" Field**
All Lab 50 emails are sent from [**customerservice@photofinale.com**](mailto:customerserivce@photofinale.com).
This is due the requirements we go through in order to minimize the chance of our dealers' mail being classified as SPAM.
We employ a number of countermeasures:
- **[SPF](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sender_Policy_Framework)** Validation
- **[Sender ID](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sender_ID)** Validation
- **[DKIM](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/DomainKeys_Identified_Mail)** Validation
- Monitor and limit hard-bounce and ISP complaint feedback
**Best Practices for Formatting Emails in Lab 50 for Photo Finale Web**
- **Add a human-readable name to email "From" addresses**
EX: From: **Rachel's Photo <service@rachelsphoto.com>**
The email will appear in a customer's inbox as "Rachel's Photo" rather than "service@rachelsphoto.com".
Not having a "real name" is also one of the tests which makes a message more likely to be identified as spam (known as the "NO_REAL_NAME" test).
- **Include the order number in the subject**
- **Include his store address in the email body**
- **Avoid using All CAPs and stick to proper grammar conventions**
- **If using HTML as the formatting, make sure that the HTML is well formed and WC3-compliant**
These additions/changes to the email message content can help lower its spam score when analyzed. There are several websites and services that will rate what you've got and help with this effort.
**Use the Samples provided and edit them to make them yours**
**[Download HTML files here.](https://secure.photofinale.com/share/lab50email/HTML_emails.zip)**
**Configuration Options Explained**
- **Name:** Name of the email to be sent out, such as Order Confirmation or Password Reminder.
- **Description:** Description of event, only viewable within Lab 50.
- **Enabled:** Make the email active.
- **Deleted:** Mark this email message as deleted.
- **Format:** Choose the email format to use for messages. Options include Plain Text or HTML.
- **Brand:** Used if multiple brands are set for your store. A brand must be selected in order for emails to be sent to customers.
- **Event:** Select an event from the drop-down list of events to trigger the email.
Options include the following:
- **Order Received** - sent when customer submits order via website / mobile app
- **Order Printed** - sent when the order is marked as "printed" by Lab 50 / Print 50
- **Order Ready for Pickup** - sent when a pickup order is marked as "complete" in Lab 50 / Print 50 / myLab
- **txtOrderDelivered** - requires Shipping Master bundle and the package must be shipped via one of our supported, trackable carriers. If the dealer is shipping themselves, then they must enter tracking info in for the package. (if no email is set for this trigger, a default is sent)
- **txtOrderRefunded** - sent when a refund has been issued via myLab (if no email is set for this trigger, a default is sent)
- **Order Shipped** - sent when a shipping order is marked as "complete" in Lab 50 / Print 50 / myLab
- **Membership Purchase - Web** - sent when a customer signs up for membership (free or paid) on web
- **Membership Purchase - APM** - (no longer used)
- **Membership Expiring** - (not currently used)
- **Password Reset** - sent when a customer hits Forgot password button on site (if no email is set for this trigger, a default is sent)
- **Share Album** - sent when a customer shares a collection (if no email is set for this trigger, a default is sent)
- **Share My Photos** - (no longer valid)
- **Upload Complete** - can be used to house the PRO Upload Complete email, and then set by PF team in the database (if no email is set for this trigger, a default is sent)
- **Customer Feedback** - (not currently used)
- **Account Inactive** - (not currently used)
- **From:** Enter the from email in this format: The Company Name <**info@thecompanyhere.com**> (This provides the Descriptive from email name, and the reply-to address.
The technical from email address will be **customerservice@photofinale.com** but will look like whatever you have in place of The Company Name in the user's inbox.)
- **To:** Automatically enters the customer email - % customer_email %
- **CC:** Select an additional email address to copy on sent messages.
- **BCC:** Select an additional email address to blind copy on sent messages.
- **Message Subject and Body:** Several messages are pre-loaded for your convenience. You can modify the text by clicking in the appropriate field and adding/removing text as needed.
**Alternative to Using PF Web's Email Servers and Service**
We do offer a custom email address option for an additional fee--ask your sales rep for pricing.
---
## Marketplace Bundle Notes for Emails
# Marketplace Bundle (Subscription) (prev called Shipment & Delivery Master Bundle)
This set of features is designed for dealers who want more control managing shipments to consumers and to/from wholesale outlabs. This pack adds postal address verification (US & Canada) to the website, real-time shipment tracking, and a new set of notification emails (delivery notification, wholesale shipment notification and wholesale delivery notification). You can rest easy knowing where packages are going and when they arrive.
- Postal address verification for US & Canada. Automatic validation and correction of common errors. Identification of missing apartment/suite numbers, invalid street numbers, undeliverable addresses, and more. Automatic ZIP+4 encoding. Depending upon the error condition reported, after 2 or 3 validation warnings customers are allowed to bypass.
- Real-time shipment tracking via a “Track Order” button in the order confirmation email or from the Order History page within their account, customers can see current location/status of a package and history of waypoints.
- Delivery notification email. Customers receive a notification email when packages from their order are delivered (either from your dealer or an outlab supplier).
- *Coming soon:* Wholesale shipment notification email. Notification to your lab operators when an outlab ships a package to your store.
- *Coming soon:* Wholesale delivery notification email. Notification to your lab operators when outlab packages arrive at your store.
Full Info: [https://www.photofinale.com/bundles/](https://www.photofinale.com/bundles/)
# Order Tracking Button/Function
What it means in terms of Lab 50, is that you can add a Track Order button to your order confirmation and order shipped email templates in Lab 50 to include this macro/link.
**href="\{%order\_status\_url%\}"**
This links to a detailed "Order Status" page for the user that shows tracking and delivery info -- works for anonymous customers as well as members. For shipped orders it shows the real-time package tracking and expected arrival date (if available).
For members, it's the same page they'd see if they went to Order History, and then clicked on a specific order.
# Shipment Delivery Email Setup
The following emails are available for the new Shipment Delivery email trigger.
### Sections
The items in subsections will be repeated for each applicable item (e.g. each product in the current shipment).
| Section Tag | Subsection Tags | Description |
|:-------------------------------------------------------------|:--------------------------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| <delivery\_order\_complete> </delivery\_order\_complete> | | This section will be shown if the order is complete (i.e. all items delivered). |
| <delivery\_order\_incomplete> </delivery\_order\_incomplete> | | This section will be shown if the order is incomplete (i.e. not all items delivered). |
| <this\_shipment> </this\_shipment> | <shipment\_items> </shipment\_items> | This section will filter on the order items delivered in the shipment we are notifying the customer about. |
| <other\_shipments> <other\_shipments> | <shipment> <shipment\_items> </shipment\_items> </shipment> | This section will list all shipments other than the current one and their contents. The <shipment> section will be repeated for each additional shipment in the order, and within that the <shipment\_items> section repeated for each product in that shipment. |
| <unshipped\_items> </unshipped\_items> | <unshipped\_item> </unshipped\_item> | This section will list items that have not shipped at all. |
### Shipment Macros
These macros can be used within a <this\_shipment> or <shipment> sections.
| Macro | Description | Example |
|:-----------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|:----------------------|
| \{%shipment\_delivery\_date%\}
| The date & local time of the delivery (today). | 9/20/2019 12:44:00 PM | | \{%shipment\_date%\} | Date the shipment was sent. | 9/12/2019 9:21:00 AM | | \{%shipment\_expected\_date%\} | Date the shipment is expected to arrive. Not available for all carriers / shipments. | 9/18/2019 | | \{%shipment\_status%\} | Package status reported by the carrier, grouped into one of these four buckets: Preparing to Ship, Shipped, Delivered, Shipping Exception | Delivered | | \{%shipment\_tracking\_number%\} | The carrier's tracking number. | 1Z2W322A0381541838 | | \{%shipment\_carrier\_code%\} | The name of the shipment carrier. | UPS MI | ### Item Macros These macros can be used within the <shipment\_items> or <unshipped\_items> sections. | Macro | Description | Example | |:---------------------|:-----------------------------|:-----------------------| | \{%item\_name%\}
| The product name. | 2'x8' Mesh Banner | | \{%item\_quantity%\} | The quantity of the product. | 2 | | \{%item\_status%\} | The status of the item. | Preparing for Shipment | ### Item Status For shipped items, the item status macro will result in one of our four friendly bucket strings listed above: - Preparing to Ship - Shipped - Delivered - Shipping Exception For unshipped items, it will be one of the standard PF order status values: - Placed - Received (Processing) - Sent to Lab - Preparing for Production - Color Correction in Progress - Order Ready for Production - In Production - Produced, Ready for Quality Check - Quality Review in Progress - Quality Review Passed - In Transit to Pickup Store - Ready for Pickup / Shipped - Cancelled - Error Status - On Hold - Order will not be processed until corrections are made ### Sample ```
Your order {%order_number%} was delivered on {%shipment_delivery_date%}.
Part of order {%order_number%} was delivered on {%shipment_delivery_date%}.
Carrier: {%shipment_carrier_code%}
Tracking: {%shipment_tracking_number%}
Status: {%shipment_status%}
Product Quantity
{%item_name%} {%item_quantity%}
Items shipped separately:
________________________________________________
Tracking: {%shipment_tracking_number%}
Status: {%shipment_status%}
Date Shipped: {%shipment_date%}
{%item_name%} {%item_quantity%}
These items have not yet shipped:
{%item_name%} {%item_quantity%} {%item_status%}
```
# FAQ
**Q: Do only dealers subscribed to that bundle have access to add the Order Tracking macro?**
A: No, that macro should be used in everyone's email template (we think!) but for dealers without the Shipment bundle, the order status page won't show detailed tracking or delivery info and instead will link to the tracking page on the carrier's website.
**Q: How do I input the tracking number into an order is this done through Lab 50 or MyLab?**
A: Yes, Print 50, Lab 50 or myLab. In the apps, right-click on an order and choose "Add Tracking Number". In myLab, go to the Fulfillment tab.
**Q: Is there a way to integrate somehow with Canada Post tracking so we do not have to manually input orders.**
A: Not at this time. Integration with something like ShipStation which would receive the address from our system, print out a shipping label, and then hand the tracking number back to our systems automatically is under consideration for 2021. Using myLab, it should take very little time to input an order's tracking number.
**Q: How does Photo Finale with the tracking number know that something has been delivered to send the Delivery notification email?**
A: We integrate with a parcel tracking service that itself integrates with over 600 carriers worldwide to connect with their APIs and poll for package status updates every few hours.
---
## Letting Customers Know The Order is Done
*Learn how to notify customers when their order is complete by editing email messages, using triggered macros, and enabling SMS text notifications.*
- [Editing Email Messages](/store-setup/order-completion-notifications/editing-email-messages)
- [Marketplace Bundle Notes for Emails](/store-setup/order-completion-notifications/marketplace-bundle-notes-for-emails)
- [Triggered Email Messages (Macros, Regions, Samples)](/store-setup/order-completion-notifications/triggered-email-messages-macros-regions-samples)
- [SMS / Text Message Notification](/store-setup/order-completion-notifications/sms-text-message-notification)
---
## SMS / Text Message Notification
August 2018 (PF13): After submitting the order, customer can opt-in to receive a text message when their order is ready for pickup or has been shipped. This text is triggered by you pushing the Order Complete button in myLab, Lab 50 or Print 50.
Demo:
---
## Triggered Email Messages (Macros, Regions, Samples)
*Learn how to use macros, region tags, and sample templates to customize triggered email messages for orders, shipping, and delivery in Lab 50.*
Table of Contents:
[General Macros](#general-macros) | [Shipping and Delivery Macros](#shipping-and-delivery-macros) | [Order Details Macros](#order-details-macros) | [Region Macros](#region-macros) | [Sample Lab 50 Triggered Messages, HTML](#sample-lab-50-triggered-messages-html) | [Sample PDF shipping label form (copy the Google Sheet and edit, then download to pdf, send to PF)](#sample-pdf-shipping-label-form-copy-the-google-sheet-and-edit-then-download-to-pdf-send-to-pf)
For available macros, right-click in the message body when setting up your email in Lab 50.
## General Macros
\{%dealer\_name%\}
\{%dealer\_web\_site%\}
\{%dealer\_phone%\}
\{%dealer\_email%\}
\{%dealer\_unsubscribe\_url%\}
\{%dealer\_logo\_header%\}
\{%dealer\_logo\_footer%\}
\{%dealer\_logo\_thumbnail%\}
\{%dealer\_logo\_invoice%\}
\{%customer\_email%\}
\{%customer\_first\_name%\}
\{%customer\_last\_name%\}
\{%billing\_address%\}
\{%billto\_street%\}
\{%billto\_city%\}
\{%billto\_region%\}
\{%billto\_postalcode%\}
\{%billto\_country%\}
\{%billto\_phone%\}
\{%shipping\_address%\}
\{%shipto\_first\_name%\}
\{%shipto\_last\_name%\}
\{%shipto\_company%\}
\{%shipto\_street%\}
\{%shipto\_city%\}
\{%shipto\_region%\}
\{%shipto\_postalcode%\}
\{%shipto\_country%\}
\{%shipto\_phone%\}
\{%shipto\_email%\}
\{%item\_name%\}
\{%item\_description%\}
\{%item\_quantity%\}
\{%item\_price%\}
\{%item\_total%\}
\{%order\_number%\}
\{%order\_date%\}
\{%order\_total%\}
\{%order\_discount%\}
\{%order\_service\_fee%\}
\{%order\_status\_url%\} >> for subscribers to the [Shipment & Delivery Master Bundle](https://www.photofinale.com/bundles/) this links to your PF site's order status page with detailed tracking and delivery info. If you do not have this Bundle, the order status page will have a link to the carrier's website.
\{%rush\_order\_fee%\}
\{%order\_subtotal%\}
\{%order\_tax%\}
\{%order\_shipping\_total%\}
\{%order\_details%\}
\{%order\_source%\}
\{%shipping\_method%\}
\{%store\_location%\}
\{%store\_name%\}
\{%store\_number%\}
\{%store\_phone%\}
\{%store\_address%\}
\{%store\_hours%\}
\{%apple\_wallet\_id%\}
\{%date%\}
\{%today%\}
## Shipping and Delivery Macros
>> Go to this page for these macros [https://wiki.photofinale.com/pages/viewpage.action?pageId=159875136](/store-setup/order-completion-notifications/marketplace-bundle-notes-for-emails)
## Order Details Macros
These macros are used for the repeating section where the order details are displayed.
##### Aggregated-Items Global Macros
- \{%item\_name%\}
- \{%item\_quantity%\}
- \{%item\_baseprice%\}
- \{%item\_baseprice\_qty%\}
- \{%item\_baseprice\_subtotal%\}
- \{%item\_subtotal%\}
##### Aggregated-Item-Discount Subsection Macros
- \{%discount\_name%\}
- \{%discount\_quantity%\}
- \{%discount\_price%\}
- \{%discount\_savings%\}
- \{%discount\_subtotal%\}
##### Aggregated-Item-Personalization Subsection Macros
- \{%personalization%\}
## Region Macros
Region macros allow you to include/exclude a section of an email message based on a real-time order value. Examples:
- If one pickup location is closed on Sundays, your Order Confirmation and Order Ready for Pickup emails could show a special "Reminder: This location is closed on Sundays" message for orders that are destined for pickup there.
- You could include a message about a special discount code for future orders in the Order Confirmation message for members only.
- You can include separate information on production times if an order contains supplier-fulfilled products that are produced offsite and shipped.
#### Syntax
A region macro requires a matching start region tag and end region tag. The tags are matched using the *name* parameter. The *name* is only used for matching the start and end, so it can be anything that is unique within the email message.
**Example Start & End Tags**
```xml
HTML CONTENT HERE
```
The start region tag also includes a *variable* parameter which indicates what variable is the comparison criteria, and a value parameter which is the value to match. For example:
**Example OrderType Region Macro**
```xml
HTML CONTENT HERE
```
#### Reference Guide
The complete list of available variables and associated values:
| Variable | Accepted Values | Description |
|:--------------------------|:-------------------------------------------------------|:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| OrderType | pickup
mail | | | CustomerType | guest
member | | | OrderSource | web
app
kiosk
pro | | | ProductMix | local
supplier
both
supplier-or-both | | | PickupLocationId | <id> | This is the PF database ID for the specified location, which can be found by going to the Store Details page on myLab and grabbing the ID from the final section of the URL. For example "58114" if the URL was: https://mylab.photofinale.com/StoreManagement/Locations/Edit/58114 | | PickupLocationStoreNumber | <number> | This is the configured value in the "Store Number (Optional)" field on the Store Details page. | | IncludesProductTag | <tag> | If a product with the specified tag is in the order, the region will be shown. | #### Nested Regions Nested Regions are supported, for example: **Example OrderType Region Macro** ```xml HTML CONTENT: Your order is being fulfilled by a supplier, we'll call you when your order is ready for pickup in 7-10 business days. ``` #### Else Statements A region can include an "ELSE" clause, which will be shown if the region criteria is false, for example: **Example OrderType Region Macro** ```xml HTML CONTENT: Your order will be ready in 7-10 days. HTML CONTENT: Your order will be ready in 3-4 days. ``` ## Sample Lab 50 Triggered Messages, HTML [lab50-emails1.zip](..\..\..\..\..\attachments\.zip) ## Sample PDF shipping label form (copy the Google Sheet and edit, then download to pdf, send to PF) For use with this sample email: simple\_order-confirmation-2-for-film.html [https://docs.google.com/document/d/1-o5kRkHiOHUVZn8os7GosFSrXLJ1pTeeOx3iKfnA8u0/copy](https://docs.google.com/document/d/1-o5kRkHiOHUVZn8os7GosFSrXLJ1pTeeOx3iKfnA8u0/copy) --- ## Adding a House Account Payment Type When online payment is required in all orders, but the retailer wants to extend term payment to his house accounts and bill them on a periodic basis, rather than collecting their payment at the time of online order, you can take "payment" by "charge store account" and invoice them later. **To set up:** - In Lab 50: Store Mgmt > Payment Settings. - Add a new payment, choose Retail Store Account. - The number of digits can be set in the admin, so when the customer orders, he chooses to “pay with a store card” and enters his designated number. The order submits as long as the correct number of digits is entered, and shows in Lab 50 as “pay in store” (no number is included with the order).  **To invoice:** Each month (or other interval), the retailer runs the “**Online - Sales - Line Item Detail**” from myLab (more info [Reports](/mylab/reports/overview)) with the correct timeframe designated. The report would then be sorted by payment type to filter the orders where no payment type has been set (these are considered “unpaid online” (essentially “pay in store”), then sort by customer email address to group each house account’s orders for that billing period. --- ## Adding a VAT Rate *Learn how to add a VAT rate in Store Management by creating or editing a Tax Rule and saving your changes correctly.* To add a VAT: 1. Click on the **Store Management** tab on the top tab fields then **Tax Rules**  2. If you don’t have an existing Tax Rule, click on **New** or **Create a new Tax Rule**. If there’s an existing rule, double-click on this specific Tax Rule.  3. Once, the tax rule section open, please make sure you pick the **VAT** field in order to perform the change. Make sure you press **Save** to retain the changes  --- ## Configuring Credit Card Processing *Configure a payment gateway in Lab 50 so labs can require customers to pay for web orders online before printing.* The Photo Finale platform can be configured to accept credit card payments, so labs can require customers to pay for web orders at time of order creation before the lab prints the order. Photo Finale's preferred payment gateway partner is [Stripe](https://stripe.com), which is available in [51 countries](https://stripe.com/global), has an integrated & streamlined on-boarding experience, and supports the widest array of payment methods including: - Card payments (global and regional) - Mobile Wallets (ApplePay & Google Pay) - Stripe Link (one-click checkout) - Buy Now Pay Later (Affirm, Klarna) - Instant Bank Payment Additional supported gateways: - [Authorize.NET](https://www.authorize.net/) (US & CA) - [QuickPay](https://quickpay.net/) ([38 countries](https://quickpay.net/helpdesk/can-we-use-quickpay/) in Europe & UK) - [Braintree](https://www.braintreepayments.com/products/braintree-direct) (US, CA, Europe, Australia, New Zealand, Singapore, Hong Kong, and Malaysia) - [PayPal](http://paypal.com/) (US, CA, UK, Europe, AU, Asia) - [Moneris](https://www.moneris.com/en/solutions/ecommerce/moneris-gateway) (CA)
**iOS App Compatibility**
The custom iOS App is only compatible with the following gateways: Stripe, Authorize.NET, and Moneris.
If you wish to offer a custom app for your customers, please select from one of these.
Once the account has been established with the processor, the credentials will need to be entered in Lab 50. The required information will vary based on the processor.
To configure the processor information, access **Account Management** > **Payment Processing**, then check the box to *"Process credit card transactions online"*, and enter the necessary payment provider information. The configuration settings include the following:
- **Process credit card transactions online:** If you choose to use online payment processing for your online orders, check the box. Please note that as of December 2009, credit card information will not appear in Lab 50. If you would like to only accept credit card payments for processing in-store, make sure this box is not checked.
- **Payment Provider:** Select your provider from the list of currently supported online payment processing providers.
If you choose Authorize.net, these are your choices:
- Authorize payment – only authorizes payment without capturing it. You would manually capture the payment using [Authorize.net](http://Authorize.net) or use Lab 50 / Print 50 to capture the payment by right-clicking on an order and choosing "Charge Payment".
- Authorize + auto-charge – authorizes payment when orders are placed and then automatically captures the payment in a nightly batch for orders that are marked as printed or completed.
- Authorize + Capture – captures the payment as soon as it is submitted.
- **User name & Password:** Enter the online payment processing account login credentials provided by the merchant.
The login credential field names will vary depending on which payment processor you are using for fulfillment.
Once the information has been saved, you'll need to setup the payment methods that will be accepted on the website. To access the payment methods section, click on **Store Management** > **Payment Methods** and enter the types of payments that will be accepted on the website. The box to Process payments via e-commerce gateway will need to be checked for each credit card option that is created.
For PCI compliance, all credit cards must be processed through the online gateway as the credit card information cannot be sent to Lab 50 for manual processing. When order information is viewed in Lab 50, the transaction number will be available for review, but the credit card details will not be provided.
Fields to complete include the following:
- **Name:** Name to use for the form of payment or a house account.
- **Process payments via e-commerce gateway:** Must be checked for online processing as of December 2009.
- **Credit Card Number of Digits:** Mastercard, Visa, and Discover use 16 digits for credit card numbers while American Express uses 15 digits. A house account can be set to match your store's implementation.
- **Require Expiration:** Will ask customers for Expiration date. Do not set this value for house accounts.
- **Require CCV:** Will require customers to enter 3 digit verification code for Mastercard, Visa, and Discover, and 4 digits for American Express. Do not set this value for house accounts.
- **Enabled:** Mark this payment method as active.
- **Deleted:** Mark this payment method as deleted.
In order for the website to prompt for payment information, you'll need to edit the pre-payment options. These are located under **Store Management** > **Application Settings** > double-click on the brand you'd like to edit > then select the **Ordering** tab. Next, in the section for Payment select *Never Require, Always Require, or Require only for shipped orders*. If the lab would like to have all orders paid for online before processing the order, select *Always Require*.
---
## Configuring PayPal Payments
To ensure proper setup of integrating PayPal, please make sure to read and follow the steps on this page top to bottom.
- Sign up for a new business account in PayPal, or log into an existing business account that you have.
- Click on the Profile link, followed by "My selling tools", then "API access".
- Click on the "Add or edit API permissions" link.
- Click on the "Add New Third Party" button.
- Enter the username "paypal_api1.lucidiom.com" and hit the "Lookup" button.
- Select each of the API permissions shown here and then hit the "Add" button.
Your PayPal configuration is complete. Now you'll finish the setup in Lab 50.
- In Lab 50, navigate to Store Management -> Payment methods.
- Click on the "Create a new payment method" link.
- On the Payment Method details screen, select "PayPal" from the type dropdown, then enter your PayPal account email address into the "PayPal Login" field. Finally, hit the "Save" link.
The final step required is for Photo Finale to link your dealer account to PayPal. Please contact [Photo Finale Support](http://www.photofinale.com/support) and request that we finalize the PayPal setup for your dealer code.
Your Lab 50 configuration is complete. PayPal will show up as a payment option on your website within 60 minutes. Once it is available, please be sure to test a full transaction to ensure your setup is working.
---
## Configuring Stripe for Online Payment Processing
*Learn how to configure Stripe for online payment processing in Lab 50 and myLab, from account setup to connecting your API key.*
**Stripe.com** payment processing is the newest addition to Lab 50's payment processing options.
To begin **Stripe** set up, you'll need to start with **Lab 50**.
- In Lab 50, access **Account Management** > **Payment Processing**.
- Next, enable credit card processing online by checking the *"Process credit card transactions online"* box if it is not already checked.
- Select **Stripe** from the drop-down menu for the *Payment Provider*, then click *Save Changes* to save your selections. You will return to this window to complete setup after configuring your **Stripe** account online.
Once you have enabled **Stripe** in Lab 50, you'll need to configure the account connection through **myLab** and create a **Stripe.com** account if you do not already have one established.
- Log into **myLab** and access **Store Management** > **Payment Methods**. Below your currently configured payment methods, click the *Connect with Stripe* button. If you do not see this button in **myLab**, please confirm you have followed all steps above for setting up **Stripe** within **Lab 50**.
Complete the form on **Stripe.com** to create a new account, or click the *Sign in* option to log into your existing account.
Complete your **Stripe.com** connection to **myLab** by clicking the *"Connect my Stripe account"* button.
Once you are returned to **myLab**, add additional payment method for the credit cards you wish to accept.
Stripe accepts the following card types, depending upon your country:
| | |
|:--------------|:-------------------------------------------------------------------|
| United States | Visa, MasterCard, American Express, JCB, Discover, and Diners Club |
| Canada | Visa, MasterCard, and American Express |
To finalize your configuration, you will need to copy your **Stripe.com** API Key to **Lab 50**.
- Log into **Stripe.com** using your account credentials.
- Click on *Your Account* in the top, right corner of the page, then select "Account Settings".
- Click on the *API Keys* button, and you will see four keys listed. You will need to copy the *Live Secret Key* (third on the page) into **Lab 50**.
- In **Lab 50**, return to **Account Management** > **Payment Processing** and paste in your *Live Secret Key* from **Stripe.com**. *Save changes* to complete your configuration.
Please allow 30 minutes for the server to synchronize the connections between **Lab 50**, **myLab**, and **Stripe.com** before placing test orders on your website. You can view charges processed through **Stripe.com** by logging into the **Stripe.com** dashboard.
---
## Minimum Order Amount & Service Charge
*Configure minimum order amounts and service charges in Lab 50 to apply fixed or diminishing fees, with optional waivers for $0 orders.*
## Minimum Order Amount / Service Fee
A new feature in Photo Finale & Lab 50 that allows a dealer to set a minimum order amount / service charge.
### Configuration
Configuration is done in Lab 50 on the **Application Settings** screen in a new "Service Charge" groupbox.
Enter a service charge amount. The default value will be 0.00, which indicates that the feature is disabled.
The operator will also set a fee type from a dropdown menu with options for:
- Fixed service charge for all orders.
- Diminishing service charge offset by purchases.
Finally, the operator has a checkbox to determine whether a service fee should be waived if the order total is $0 (e.g. in response to a 100% off order discount).
### Calculating Service Charges
- A fixed service charge is a static amount applied to all orders.
- A diminishing service charge is calculated as: "Configured service charge value" - Subtotal + Discount
- Example: $6 subtotal, $2.75 discount, $5 base service charge. Applied service charge = $5 - $6 + $2.75 = $1.75
- Example: $6 subtotal, $2.75 discount, $3 base service charge. Applied service charge = $3 - $6 + $2.75 = negative value so no service charge
- If (Subtotal - Discount) = $0 and the "Waive service charge on $0 orders" setting is enabled, the service charge should be set to $0.
- Service fees are subject to taxation when the tax rule or tax database indicates that shipping charges are taxed.
When shipping is taxed (or pickup orders): Total = (Subtotal - Discount + Service Fee + Shipping) \* Tax
When shipping is not taxed: Total = (Subtotal - Discount) \* Tax + Service Fee + Shipping
### Behavior - PF Web
On the checkout page, an additional line is added to the Order Summary, called "Service Charge". The Service Charge is located in between "Discount" and "Shipping".
If the Service Charge value is $0 (because it's configured as such or the customer has satisfied it), the line is omitted from display.
---
## Settings for Payments, Taxes & Fees
*To setup the payment methods that will be accepted on the website, access the payment methods section by clicking on Store Management > Payment Methods, and*
| |
|:-------------------------------------|
| 
| | Creating a new Payment Method | ### Adding Payment Methods To setup the payment methods that will be accepted on the website, access the payment methods section by clicking on **Store Management > Payment Methods**, and enter the types of payments you would like to process. The box to *Process payments via e-commerce gateway* will need to be checked for each credit card option that is created. \*\***Note:** For PCI compliance, all credit cards must be processed through the online gateway as the credit card information cannot be sent to Lab 50 for manual processing. When order information is viewed in Lab 50, the transaction number will be available for review, but the credit card details will not be provided. Fields to complete include the following: - **Name:** Name to use for the form of payment or a house account. - **Process payments via e-commerce gateway:** Must be checked for online processing as of December 2009. - **Credit Card Number of Digits:** Mastercard, Visa, and Discover use 16 digits for credit card numbers while American Express uses 15 digits. A house account can be set to match your store's implementation. - **Require Expiration:** Will ask customers for Expiration date. Do not set this value for house accounts. - **Require CCV:** Will require customers to enter 3 digit verification code for Mastercard, Visa, and Discover, and 4 digits for American Express. Do not set this value for house accounts. - **Enabled:** Mark this payment method as active. - **Deleted:** Mark this payment method as deleted. --- ## Setting Tax Rules & Rates *Learn how to set up tax rules and rates in Lab 50 using the US tax table database or custom rules for states, ZIP codes, and shipping.* You have two choices for tax rate set-up: ### 1. Use our tax table database (US only). We use a tax table, which is updated on a regular basis, to calculate taxes, which are charged based on the delivery or pickup ZIP code. The tax database is updated 3 times a year and includes only US tax regions. To enable use of the tax table: 1. In **Lab 50,** click **Store Management > Application Settings > double-click Photo Finale > check-box is on the General tab.** 2. Then click **Save** (left sidebar)  ### 2. OR, you can set your own tax rules This can be either a single rate, or a ZIP-code based rate you enter yourself.. If you would like to set your own tax rules: 1. Disable the database tax table, as described above. **You must not have the database tax table enabled if you are going to define your own rules** 2. In **Lab 50,** click on **Store Management** > **Tax Rules**, then double-click on an existing rule to edit it or click on ***Create a new tax rule*** to setup a new tax option.  The configuration settings are the following: - **Name:** Enter a name for each tax rule. - **Tax description:** Select the type of tax rule you are creating. - **Tax rate:** Set the Tax Rate for each State/Province or ZIP Code. - **Tax shipping:** Select if shipped items to State/Province or ZIP Code are taxable. - **Apply on top of other taxes:** Select this option if this tax is charged in addition to other taxes. - **Apply to all orders:** Select whether or not this applies for all order types. - **Apply to the selected states/provinces/regions:** Choose one or more states/provinces/regions with the same tax rate - **Apply to the specified zip codes:** Add the ZIP Code(s) and apply this tax rule to orders from these specific areas. - **Enabled:** Mark this tax rule as active. - **Deleted:** Mark this tax rule as deleted. **Canadian dealers should set up rules like this to cover GST and HST for the various provinces (check the rates, this screenshot is for demo only)**  # FAQ: **Q:** Is there a way to tax items in shipped orders? **A:** Yes. The setup depends on whether the dealer is using the US Tax Database, Tax Rules, or a Flat Tax. With the US Tax Database, tax is automatically charged for shipped orders based on the zip code & county of the shipped order if the dealer has tax nexus in a state. By default they have tax nexus in every state that they have store locations (on our platform). If a dealer wants to charge tax in a state in which they don't currently have store locations, they can either add a dummy store location in that state (with "customer pickup" disabled) or they can give us a list of the states and we can set it in the database in a nexus override property (introduced in PF 13.5). Since it would be a pain to create more than a few dummy stores, the new nexus override property is definitely the way to go. The override list needs to be a lowercase string of comma-separated postal abbreviations. Once you have it, send it to support with your dealer code please. **Example:** "ca,co,dc,ga,il,in,ia,ky,la,md,me,mi,mn,nc,nd,ne,nj,nv,ok,ri,sd,ut,va,wa,wi,wv" **Q:** Is there a way to see what taxes are configured in the Tax DB? **A:** There's no way for the dealer to see it but we can run a query from the database and export to XLS for you. --- ## Setting the Rush Order Charge ### Overview The Rush Order Charge is a simple, dealer-enabled option that customers are presented with during checkout, as part of the Checkout Options page.  ### Configuration Configuration of the option is done in Lab 50 > Store Management > Application Settings > Ordering, in a new "Rush Charge" groupbox. There are four configurable settings: - Amount. A number spinner, similar to the one used in the Service Charge section. - Rush Charge Label. The name used for this fee, defaults to "Rush Fee". (currently max of 32 characters) - Rush Charge Description. A multi-line text field with space for a maximum of 1024 characters. (Optional) - Notification Email. A text field accepting an email address to be notified when a rush order is placed. (Optional) ### Site Behavior A Rush Order checkbox along with the price and description will be displayed on the mobile Checkout Options page. The label used for the checkbox, as well as the description and price, come from the settings set in Lab 50. If selected, the Rush Order Charge will be displayed on the checkout summary page, as well as the order summary panels shown on the other checkout pages and cart page. The charge line will be labeled using the name from Lab 50 settings, and will be placed immediately after the location of the Service Charge line. ### Notification Email If the dealer has setup a notification email, when a Rush Order is placed, a message is sent to the supplied address. - Subject: "Photo Finale: Rush Order - #26035882" - Body: - Order #26035882 - Total: $23.52 - Date Placed:08/25/16 6:20pm - Customer: Jason Pareti, [jason@photofinale.com](mailto:jason@photofinale.com), 703.568.4242 - Pickup Location: Ritz Camera Bethesda Mall ### Lab 50 / Print 50 Behavior Rush Orders will display a new icon in Lab 50 / Print 50 to indicate their status and alert operators.  The Rush Order fee will also be displayed in the order total summary. ### Order Confirmation Macros Rush Order charges will need to be shown in the order confirmation emails as well as Lab 50/Print 50 invoices. If you use these and enable the Rush Fee, make sure to add the macro to your email and invoice files. See: [Configuring Emails](/store-setup/order-completion-notifications/editing-email-messages) and [Lab 50 Invoice Customizations and Macros](/print-50/lab-50-troubleshooting-and-faqs/lab-50-invoice-customizations-and-macros) --- ## Shipping *Learn how Photo Finale's base, product-quantity, and weight-based shipping charges combine, and how to configure each in Lab 50 and myLab.* ## How to set up shipping on your PF site A common setup is to set a flat rate per a defined set of products (one price for small prints, one for large prints and calendars, one for posters, one for cards, one for gifts, one for books). We have a hybrid shipping pricing system that can combine both base charges & weight-based fees in addition to product-quantity-based charges. Some dealers will then discount the shipping (using promos) for orders over a certain amount… "Free shipping on orders over $35!" ### Quick overview: how shipping is calculated **S&H = A + B + C**, where: - **A** = Base Shipping Price (if set… set in Lab 50) - **B** = Product-Quantity-Based Shipping for products contained in shipping product groups (if set… set in myLab) - **C** = Weight-based additional fees for combined weight of products (excluding products already counted in B) (if set… set in Lab 50)
Automatically send completed orders to ShipStation for label creation and fulfillment.
## To set base shipping price (A)
1. Use **Lab 50**
2. Store Management > Shipping & Handling Charges
## To set up product-quantity-based shipping (B)
[myLab.photofinale.com](http://myLab.photofinale.com)
Store Management > Shipping Groups > Create a Shipping Group (name, default batch quantity, description):
1. Name, ex: "5x7 and smaller prints"
2. Default Batch Quantity, ex: "20" (if qty of 20 is the first change in shipping price)
3. Description (opt)
4. Open the group, Add Products > Show All Active Products and add the products or product tags you want to apply to that group… when you click OK those products will have been added to the Group.
5. Then, if you want to add extra charges, from there you will see you can now add you Price Breaks. (Just like setting Price Tiers for web catalog products). The thing to bear in mind is the Base Price you have enabled (e.g. $1.99 for US Postal Service) will be added on top of whatever values you enter in these fields.
When you add a new product, you can use the Shipping Group pulldown to add the new product to the correct shipping group (you can do this in Lab 50 and in myLab).
**Examples of product-quantity-based shipping:**
1. This has prints shipping at 1.99 for qty up to 20. 21-41 is $2.99…. all the way up to 100 prints ships at $5.99. More than 100 are priced by additional groups of 20, with each group being an extra $1.
2. Here, 1 book ships for $7.99 and each additional book adds $1 to shipping
3. This one is 5.95 for shipping, with an extra $2 added when the gift qty is 2, 3 or 4 or 5 (ie, an additional group of four total items, so $7.95
When the total qty is 6, 7, 8, 9 the shipping adds another $2 for that next set of 4, for total $9.95
When the 10th gift is added, shipping goes another $2 to $11.95… (ie, 1st product, two full groups of 4 items, then the 10th is the start of the 3rd group of 4)
4. Another example of shipping groups: showing myLab in the upper left, and Lab 50 under it with base pricing. Then on the right, the website showing how qty affects the shipping cost, based on the entries of the shipping groups in myLab.
## To set up weight-based shipping (C)
Store Management > Shipping & Handling Charges
Click the "add" button at the bottom of the "Weight-based shipping tiers" window. In this example, the base price here is $1.99. For any orders that exceed 3 ounces an additional dollar is added. The chart goes all the way up to 204 ounces with a maximum shipping cost of $28.99.
To calculate shipping by weight, each product in your product catalog needs to have a weight value entered. This can be done in myLab or Lab 50. For instance, 4x6 is assigned a weight of 0.30 ounces. In this case up to 10 4x6 prints would ship for $1.99 and once 10 were ordered the shipping price would jump to $2.99 as it would exceed 3 ounces total.
## FAQ
You can add a new shipping method for that country and have separate prices for that. You rely on the customer to select the right choice, so they could pick US when they are in Canada, but in practice we have seen this infrequently. For example: a US company could have:
- UPS Ground Shipping within US
- UPS 2-day Shipping within US
- UPS Overnight Shipping within US
- UPS Ground Shipping to Canada
Alternatively, we can limit shipments to just your country. There is a setting we can enable in the database which will hide the "country" field on the checkout page, limiting it to just the dealer's country. Let our support desk know if you would like to set it up this way.
The system doesn't automatically calculate shipping based on delivery, but you can offer choice for the customer. You do rely on the customer to pick the choice that corresponds to their location, so staff should be trained to double check. For example: A Canadian retailer may offer:
- Canada Post to BC, AB, SK, MB: $7.95
- Canada Post to ON, QC, NC, NS, PE, NL: $9.95
- Canada Post to YT: $11.95
- Canada Post to NT, NU: $29.95
---
## Sending Label Details from PF to ShipStation via Zapier
*Learn how to send Lab 50 order label details to ShipStation using Zapier, including email parsing and filtering setup for automated order syncing.*
These directions presume you have your ShipStation account all set. The basic idea here is that you are parsing order data from the Lab 50 email to use in ShipStation.
1. Set up or create an email address to use only for this workflow. It will need filtering capabilities. ex: [myphotoorderzaps@gmail.com](mailto:myphotoorderzaps@gmail.com) (no one will ever use it)
2. In Lab 50, create a second "Order Confirmation" email (trigger = order received). Set it to plain text, have it go to your newly created email address. Use this template as your email's subject and body:
1. | subject \{%shipping\_method%\} |
|:-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Order Number: \{%order\_number%\}
Date: \{%order\_date%\}
Shipping Method: \{%shipping\_method%\}
Buyer Name: \{%customer\_first\_name%\} \{%customer\_last\_name%\}
Buyer Email: \{%customer\_email%\}
Buyer Phone: \{%billto\_phone%\}
Total: \{%order\_total%\}
Shipping Total: \{%order\_shipping\_total%\}
Ship-to Name: \{%shipto\_first\_name%\} \{%shipto\_last\_name%\}
Ship-to Email: \{%shipto\_email%\}
Ship-to Phone: \{%shipto\_phone%\}
Ship-to Street: \{%shipto\_street%\}
Ship-to City: \{%shipto\_city%\}
Ship-to Region: \{%shipto\_region%\}
Ship-to Country: \{%shipto\_country%\}
Ship-to Postal Code: \{%shipto\_postalcode%\} | 3. In Zapier, create a new Zap and add the first Step: Email Parser by Zapier. This will create an inbox to receive the order emails at, it will look like something like [namehere4156789@robot.zapier.com](mailto:persnickety596102@robot.zapier.com). Copy the email address it generates. No one will see this one either. 4. Back in your email program, you want to filter all your order emails so you are only sending along the Shipping orders to the Zapier parser. (Zapier charges per "zap" so best to use email to filter rather than Zapier.) Set up a filter based on something standard in your email... if you have set shipping method names, you can use that as your parameter (ie, words in the subject), so you email program only forwards orders that need a label to the Zapier parser email address. 5. Now in Zapier, you can either place an order, or fake one by sending a message from your normal email to that special email you set up in step 1, using the template as the body (you can put in fake info) and your shipping method as the subject (to mimic an order email). Now, you can set up the parser in Zapier based on the info received. 6. Once you have the parser set up, add Step 2 to Zapier, which is called "Create Order in ShipStation" and follow the prompts to connect up that info with your ShipStation account ... The Zap will now look like this: 1.  7. Then test, test, test! --- ## Uploading Film/Slide/Photo Scans & Restoration Jobs to a PF Site/Account If you offer film developing with scan-to-digital, photo scans, slide scans, or restoration jobs, you CAN (and should!) upload the finished work so that a customer can easily download the images or add them to her account! - ## **BEST METHOD:** **PRO Uploader Tool** ## **Consumer owns the scans and it's EASIER and FASTER for lab staff, plus, LESS MISTAKES!** ## >> [See the PRO Uploader page for all the details!](/store-setup/uploading-scans-and-restoration-jobs/pro-uploader) << - **Sharing methods that are more work:** 1. 1. **GOOD - "Just viewing" Methods:** A) Create an account on your regular PF site with a general email and upload the scans to albums on that, then share the album (go to Collection Settings > Privacy). or B) Use a PF Proofing site and upload into "Events" via myLab. - Pro: No account lookup needed. If you needed to protect the images from download, you could turn on the watermark which would turn off the download button on a regular PF site. - Pro: If you are using a PF Proofing site, there's no special linking needed, you just tell consumers to go to that site and find their image set (however you archive). Event album covers can be blurred for privacy. - Either: If *wanted* user to be able to download, they could on a regular PF site by not watermarking. Users cannot currently download images from a Proofing site. - Con: The album isn’t in an account and they always need the link to access it so re-ordering or integrating with their other photos is not straightforward. 2. **BETTER - "Logging in as the customer and uploading" Method:** Even better – upload the scans right into the user’s account on your regular PF site. If they don’t have one, you create it for them. If they do have one, you can Log In as Customer from myLab (go into the acct, click the button, or use the Generate One-Time Pass, that temp pass is good for a 1 hour window). Log in, then upload, just like consumers do. - Pro: The scans are part of the person’s account, and it’s easy for them to use to order from. And, anything to get members into your site is good. They can also download the images if they want. - Con: You have collect the email beforehand (and ensure it's right), then look up (or create) the account. There is no way to prevent them from downloading the full res, since that watermark setting is one they would have access to turn on/off. You have to communicate with them once it's done (there's not an email trigger for this). - Tips: - Standardize how you title the albums so they know what it is...their last name and the date...something to set it apart from personal uploads. They can always change it. Fill in the description too. - Make sure to use Large upload so the biggest version is there for them to print with. You can even give them a special coupon code to encourage printing their new scans. - Tell your customers how to download the images (single image download can be done by clicking the image, then clicking the Download button. Or, select multiple, then click the download button. To just download the whole collection, click Collection Settings, then Download Zip.  - - - - When the upload is done, tell the customer. To email them from your store email, go to Collection Settings > Privacy & Sharing and grab the link, then email it from your store account. If you change the Sharing link to Public, you will also be able to copy the link to their account collections (good if you have created more than one folder).   - - - - Or, from within the Collection, click the Share button, and email the customer from there. This email will use the Share Album triggered email template that you have set up in Lab 50 (so make sure you have that trigger set up, and the message makes sense–keep in mind that it's the same email that will get sent when a user shares a collection).  --- ## PRO Uploader *Learn how PRO Uploader handles logins, licensing, pricing, digital upload products, scan link expiration, and supported operating systems.* ## PRO Uploader Demo (Build 34) ## General FAQs - **What is my login?** - Same as myLab and Lab/Print 50. - **How do I sign up** - [https://www.photofinale.com/go](https://www.photofinale.com/go) > slick Order a Bundle and then Film & Scan Bundle. The license will show up on your myLab Dashboard when we have added it, then you will be able to log in and start uploading! - **What if someone comes up to the counter with their film?** - You can manually enter an order into the PRO Uploader Tool. We do recommend keeping your film handling the same across web, kiosk, mobile, and in-store, it makes things easier all around! You are NOT charged the rev share commission on orders placed at kiosk or entered direction in the PRO Uploader. - **When do emails get sent? // Explain Upload Complete in PRO vs Order Complete in myLab** - The “Upload Complete” and “Order Complete” are two different things. The “Your scans are ready” email is sent automatically when the “Upload Complete” occurs in PRO. The order complete is separate. For example, if the customer ordered a scan + prints products, or if they had other non-scanning products in their cart, then it’s up to the operator to Complete the order once everything is ready. That will trigger the typical “Order Shipped” or “Order Ready to Pick Up” email. - **What is the "Updated" column as it pertains to orders in the uploader?** - The “Updated” column is the last time the order was updated. The most-recently uploaded order should always appear at top. Originally it showed the order date, but because dealers don’t necessarily work on things in order it got confusing to upload an order and then not be able to see it in the list if it happened to be an older order and was bumped down under a long list of others. - **Can I install it on more than one computer?** - The license is priced per location, but you are allowed unlimited installs within each location. - **What does it cost** - The license is an up-front fee (contact your Sales Rep), then monthly based on your tier. Your tier level is shown on your myLab Dashboard and explained here: [https://www.photofinale.com/bundles](https://www.photofinale.com/bundles) - Revenue share is charged on orders placed on your website, but not on kiosk or PRO Upload direct orders. - **How does the system know which products on my site are for upload service?** - The product must be designated a "digital upload" product in your catalog. [Here is a list of products to use.](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1dUpN6kY9hyWcggoedpJFzdvTsUMGtlQISNvha1RrIsg/edit?usp=sharing) - If you have an existing product you want to use, just click into the product and check the "Digital Upload Product" box. - **How long does the link to my scans work?** - Uploads are standalone collections available for access for 30 days via the link in the upload-complete email. Users may choose to add the uploads to their account when they are viewing them. - **Upload and sizing notes:** - JPGs only. - Photos over 8k x 8k pixels may be downsized to such. - No limit on the number of photos in a collection. - A maximum of 10 collections per upload order. - **What OS is supported?** - Windows 10, Windows 11 - Windows 8.1 will be supported until Jan 10, 2023 (when Microsoft support ends) - Mac - plan to have an installer, not yet released as of 1/1/22 - **How do you pick folders for upload and name collections?** - You can select multiple folders at a time, and use a combo of your folder and template settings to achieve the desired result. Here is a good workflow example: --- ## Adding and Enabling Outsourced Products *Learn how to add and enable outsourced products in Photo Finale using myLab or Lab 50, including in-store and third-party fulfillment setup.* Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > [3rd Party Fulfillment (aka Marketplace)](..\3rd%20Party%20Fulfillment%20(aka%20Marketplace).md) Photo Finale offers local/in-store and third-party fulfillment options. Contact the fulfiller to set up your account, then we will add access to their catalog of products. See: photofinale.com/marketplace With the catalog sharing feature, you can select to keep the products you already create in-house as in-store products while sending out for fulfillment other items you'd like to offer for pick-up. ## myLab (Recommended Method): We will share the catalog to you in myLab, you can then import it and remove what you do not want to offer via that supplier. (Basically: Click into the disabled Fulfiller category that PF has added. Open the category to move, change the Parent to where you want to move it to, check off "enable" and click OK.) Visual... ##### Lab 50 (Legacy Method): myLab is quicker. But for Lab 50, here is info. **** **** **** **** 1. Click on **Store Management** > **Product Catalog**. 2. Select the *"All Products"* folder at the top of the list on the left panel. 3. For each product you would like to offer, highlight the product in the list on the right panel by left-clicking on it. 4. Right-click on the highlighted line and choose *Enable the selected product*. ##### To enable gifts for in-store processing: 1. In the *"All Products"* folder at the top of the list on the left panel, expand the menu selections and then select *"Folio Gifts"*. 2. Next, enable the products as given in the steps above for items you'd like to process ***In-Store*** only. 3. To enable multiple products at once, select the first product you'd like to offer, then hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard while carefully selecting each subsequent product. 4. Once all of your products have been highlighted, right-click anywhere within the listing and choose *Enabled the selected products*. 5. To verify that the products are enabled, check for a small green dot to the left of the product name. It should turn green for each enabled item. 6. Lastly, the products will need to be added to your existing web catalog. The catalog currently in use on your website will be indicated by a blue circle with checkmark. You can add products to existing categories or elect to create new categories for your gift products. NOTE: the catalog of products available for in store processing is not identical to the EQ Gifting program. There may be differences in product specs and in the products offered. ##### To enable gifts for processing via third-party production 1. Scroll to the bottom of the left panel and expand the option for *Supplier Catalogs*. 2. Next, select *"XX Fulfillment."* . 3. You may either import the entire catalog, which pulls over all products, product hierarchy and group icons, or you may choose to enable individual products. First, click into the Fulfillment supplier catalogs and enable the products you want to offer: 1. Click into each to expand the individual categories to find the products you would like to offer for pick-up in-store. 2. Enable the products as given in the steps above for items you'd like to process via Lucidiom Fulfillment only. 3. To enable multiple products at once, select the first product you'd like to offer, then hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard while carefully selecting each subsequent product. 4. Once all of your products have been highlighted, right-click anywhere within the listing and choose *Enabled the selected products*. To verify that the products are enabled, check for a small green dot to the left of the product name. It should turn green for each enabled item. 4. To import the entire catalog (for most users this is recommended for the EQ Gifting catalog) 1. Right click on your default catalog (the one with the blue check) 2. Select Import > From Supplier > Lucidiom Fulfillment > EQ Gifting 5. Or, to pick and choose products (for most users this will be the process by which to add selected products from the catalogs) to add: 1. Click into your default catalog (blue circle with checkmark), create a new category or click into an existing one and click Add Product. Browse to the supplier catalog and select the product(s) you want to offer. --- ## 3rd Party Fulfillment (aka Marketplace) *Learn how dealers can add, price, and fulfill 3rd party Marketplace products in Photo Finale, from catalog setup to shipping and payment options.* #### For Dealers: General Info We have a list of partners who offer fulfillment services on our platform. Some of these are strictly fulfillment/production companies, some are content providers and some are retail photofinishers who are offering a selection of products they produce for other retailers to offer. All catalogs are available online and on kiosk via the PF@Kiosk feature. You can find the complete list of Marketplace Partners here: [https://www.photofinale.com/marketplace/](https://www.photofinale.com/marketplace/). To start offering one of these Marketplace Partners' catalogs of products, contact the partner. They will get you signed up with an account on their end, then they will notify us that you have been approved to offer their catalog of products. We will grant your PF account access to their catalog, and send you an email with instructions. **For Dealers: Adding the Products** 1. **Import the whole catalog:** In Lab 50, go to the supplier's catalog (Product Catalog, left sidebar at the bottom), enable everything. Go to your default catalog, right-click and choose Import Supplier Catalog, then click through to the desired catalog. \*\* This will copy all of the groups and products into your catalog. Before you import, compare your default catalog's existing group structure to ensure it does not match the supplier's, as this will cause an issue. If there is a conflict, rename your groups or add products another way. 2. **Pepper in the new products:** You can use Lab 50 or myLab for this method. Navigate to the group where you want the product, click Add Product and find the fulfiller's product and add it. These methods are shown in this video: 3. **Cover your wholesale and shipping costs:** 1. The suppliers generally include an MSRP, good product name and clear description...but not always! Please make sure to check each product you are offering for correct pricing. You should communicate shipping cost and terms as part of the product name, group and/or description. For ease of setup, we recommend that you include the shipping cost in with the price of the item. You can also set up shipping groups, flat base rates, and pricing by weight...check out the page on [Shipping](/store-setup/shipping/overview) for other options. 2. You and the supplier should agree on wholesale prices, shipping costs and terms, delivery terms, return policy and invoicing terms prior to the supplier requesting us to grant you access to the catalog. Photo Finale is not party to your agreements. Our % fee is the same off of these products as it is with all your other online offerings. Be sure you factor this in to your costs. #### For Dealers: Operations 1. **Collect payment!** You cannot require payment specifically for third party products, but you can require payment for all online orders or all online orders over a certain amount. We highly recommend you set this–to set, in Lab 50, go to: Store Management > Application Settings > Order tab. If you offer shipping but have no payment requirement, you won't get paid for the product. 2. **Delivering the order:** You should discuss shipping options and how you are charged for shipping with your supplier. There are a number of ways to deliver the order. 1. **Ship to store:** Some suppliers only ship back to the store (oftentimes they group and ship weekly for cost savings) for pickup even if the consumer selected "mail" so it is up to the retailer to ship it out...if you desire this option, you must clarify with the supplier. 2. **Consumer choice:** You can offer your standard in-store and/or mail just like you probably do for your in-house products. But, keep in mind you need to communicate the delivery time will be longer for these items than ones you produce in-house, and, because the supplier still has to ship the item to you, there is still a shipping cost to cover. 3. **Force mail delivery of third party products:** Using myLab's "Store Location Product Fulfillment" setting you can set a store location to only allow pickup of certain items. Any products that are not included in the fulfillment settings will be forced as a shipped order. To set this up, in myLab, navigate to Store Management > Store Locations > select the location > select the product fulfillment tab you will see where to set this up. Essentially every single item that should be available for in-store pickup will need to be included in the product fulfillment section. If a store has multiple locations this will need to be done for each location. Any items left off the fulfillment list will be force shipped. 3. **Consumer expectations:** Most retailers offer a mix of in-house and third-party-fulfilled products. There is not a setting to communicate various delivery times based on products, so you must handle this some way, so your customers know what to expect. We have seen some good communications by retailers including: 1. Included a note in the product group and/or modify the product group icon. Ex: One group called “In-store Books: 3 days” and a second named “Specialty Books: 7-10 Days.” 2. Edit your Order Confirmation email with a note on varying delivery times. 3. Include details in the product name and/or description. 4. **Who ordered what?** 1. You will see the product come through your Lab 50 and you can run a report to see products your customers have ordered from your suppliers. **myLab.photofinale.com > Reports > Online - Line Item Status by Supplier** **** **Lab 50 display**  **myLab Report** ## View an excel [for-retailer.xlsx](..\..\..\attachments\.xlsx) #### For Suppliers: General Info Contact Photo Finale to get started on our platform. We have a large library of products you can offer to start, and can work with you to add your custom products. When a dealer contacts you, we recommend that you both agree on wholesale prices, shipping costs and terms, delivery terms, return policy and invoicing terms prior to the supplier requesting us to grant you access to the catalog. Photo Finale is not party to your agreements. Our % fee is the same off of these products as it is with all the dealer's other online offerings. Once you have set them up, let us know via an online form. We take about 2 business days to grant them access to your catalog. We maintain a list of partners on our website and request logo, 1-line summary, email, phone, delivery region and a link to your product catalog (website or pdf). [https://www.photofinale.com/partner-programs/marketplace/](https://www.photofinale.com/partner-programs/marketplace/) #### For Suppliers: Product Catalog Changes You are responsible for communicating about changes to your catalog going forward, and about your holiday ordering deadlines. You are free to offer incentives, specials, sample kits and marketing programs. Once your catalog is shared to a dealer, they have a copy of it and may alter it (although cannot print the items locally). This means that any price changes or product additions/deletions you make in your master catalog will not be pushed out to the dealers who offer your catalog. You should maintain a good line of communication so that you are able to tell them when things change. Most often, you will have a new product or set that you will add...we can help with the directions retailers will need to add your new products to their websites. #### For Suppliers: Collecting Orders Just as with a photofinishing dealer, orders for you to fulfill are collected in Lab 50 and reports are accessible via myLab . This Lab 50 is from a photofinisher who is also a supplier to other dealers. The highlighted order and the two above it are from other dealers who offer her catalog and the rest of the orders are from her own customers using her website. #### For Suppliers: Invoicing  Invoice terms and what wholesale and shipping costs are owed, are between you and the dealer, but if you need a record of what dealers' customers have ordered, use the **myLab > Report > Online – Catalog Subscriber Line Item Detail** which can be run for a settable timeframe and exported in a variety of formats. #### For Suppliers: Best Practices We will share that catalog out and the other dealer will import it… so whatever you put in is what they will get, and in those groups with all the details along with it. These are changes usually made: 1. Pricing—MSRP and wholesale 2. Product names, descriptions, images 3. Category images, descriptions Other notes: 1. If there is a turnaround stated, for example, you may want to remove that from a description since it will be different for the other dealer. Or, anything that may detail your dealer name (except for the one top level category, that is the only spot you need your name/logo and it’s not used on the dealer’s site. 2. A supplier catalog cannot have any disabled products or categories. If you have groups or products you do not want to offer for wholesale, or aren’t ready yet, please delete. If you have a linked photo cover category which would normally be disabled in a dealer catalog must be enabled in the supplier catalog. 3. If you decide to discontinue or need to temporarily remove a product (due to inventory, for example) we have a way to do that across all dealers you supply, we just need the product info (product name, ID, and database ID). 4. SHIPPING. This is always a tough one to sort out. The shipping settings that are in the dealer catalog are what gets applied. So you need to make sure to communicate to the dealer how you want to do shipping so that they can set it up to appropriately cover costs. Shipping for their customer may be different that what you actually charge the dealer, so just as long as you are clear on terms and fees and that your shipping settings in the supplier catalog do not carry through. For this reason, some dealers include shipping in the product msrp and wholesale. ## View an excel [for-supplier.xlsx](..\..\..\attachments\.xlsx) ---
[ CUSTOM CONTENT ]
```
Order !ORDER_NUMBER!
*!ORDER_NUMBER!*
| | Setup Wizard Printer Configuration Screen | **Using Lab 50 installed on a separate computer:** 1. Click on the Settings tab in Lab 50. 2. Select the Fulfillment option on the left side of the screen to expand it. 3. Select Print Server. 4. Press the **Setup Wizard** button, and the Setup Wizard will launch. **Once you have the Setup Wizard open:** 1. Click on **Printer Configuration**. 2. Click on **Add Printer**. 3. In the menu at the right, select **Windows Printer**. 4. In the **Printer Name** field, enter **“Express”**, or any name you wish to use. 5. Click the **Add** button. 6. Click on the newly created **Windows Printer** Interface option in the top, left corner to display the options for this interface. **Windows Printer Interface General Settings:** - **Printer Name:** Select the Windows printer driver name desired from the drop- down menu. - **Band Output:** This feature sends blocks of lines to be printed to the Windows spooler, which results in faster printing, especially for enlargements. This should only be set to **True** for large format printers. - **Rotate Variable Length:** This will rotate the image to save on paper usage. This should only be set to true for large format printers. - **Reprint photo on error:** The option should only be set to True when using Mitsubishi printers. The default value is false. - **Continue Job After Item Failure:** If this option is set to True, the APM software will continue printing the current job in the event of any unexpected printer error. The default value is false. - **Debug Mode:** If after changing all of the settings the Windows Printer interface does not work, come back into this screen and set this to **True**. The default value is false. **Border Alignment Settings:** Settings in the Border Alignment section are not typically used unless additional border space is needed on one or more sides. This is due to the fact that border alignment problems are best resolved by manually adjusting the position of the paper roll/ink ribbon inside the printer. However, if the issue still persists after the manual re-adjustment of the paper roll/ink ribbon, you can specify values in the following fields to adjust the borders. (The default values are **0in**). - **Left Border Adjustment:** Adjust the left border by entering positive numbers to shift the border to the right; negative numbers to shift it to the left. - **Right Border Adjustment:** Adjust the right border by entering positive numbers to shift the border to the right; negative numbers to shift it to the left. - **Top Border Adjustment:** Adjust the bottom border by entering positive numbers to shift the border down ; negative numbers to shift it up. - **Bottom Border Adjustment:** Adjust the left border by entering positive numbers to shift the border up; negative numbers to shift it down. \*\***Note:** Images will be moved but not resized. You must use Lucidiom’s length notation, which is either 1000 x inches or 100 x mm. Example: 4000in is 4 inches, 15000mm is 15 cm. - **Printer DPI** can be changed to a higher or lower value depending on the configuration of the printer, but by default it is set to **300**. | | |:-------------------------------------| | 
| | Windows Printer Interface | --- ## Windows Printer The Windows Printer interface allows the APM or Lab 50 software to print orders generated from an APM to a printer(s) that are setup using a Windows driver. ### Prerequisites 1. The Windows driver for the printer needs to be properly installed and configured to print the correct size on the APM if the APM is to print locally or it should be installed on the machine running Lab 50 if that program is being used to manage the orders for printing. 2. If Lab 50 is not present in the local installation, then at least one or more fulfillments must be enabled to print to a local printer connected to the APM. This is seen in the screenshot on below, taken from the main options of an enabled fulfillment in the Setup Wizard. | | |:----------------------------| |  | | Print Settings | ### Setting Up a Windows Printer Using the Setup Wizard The Setup Wizard is used to configure the APM to print to the Windows Printer Interface. **This process includes the following steps:** 1. Adding the printer interface and editing the general settings. 2. Assigning printable products to the interface. --- ## Zoom Album Configuration and Printer Setup To configure the zoom album product, you will need to begin by adding the product to your current fulfillment offerings. In the Setup Wizard, you will need to click on the fulfillment for which you wish to offer the zoom album product, enter a price, and then in the box at the bottom of the product screen, you will need to change the output type to jpeg. For zoom albums and zoom album covers, this should always be set to jpg. For the printer configuration, you will want to visit the manufacturer's website to get the latest and greatest driver software for your printer model. This driver should be installed on whatever machine will be directly handling the printing of the zoom album, so it may be the kiosk or lab 50. There should be two instances of the drivers installed in windows if you are going to be offering the zoom covers in addition to the zoom album. One driver instance should be configured for each product, and it may be helpful to name the printer according to which product it will be printing ie. the "ZoomCover" printer will be configured for printing the zoom cover product. The drivers should be configured as follows: Zoom Album Pages: Legal Size Paper Glossy Photo Paper Paper Source - Auto-Sheet Feeder Zoom Album Cover Sticker: 4.5x7.75 Custom Paper Size Glossy Photo Paper Paper Source - Cassette Once you have the two printer instances added, you will need to go into the Setup Wizard and configure two windows printers - one for the zoom album pages and one for the zoom covers. Once they have been added, assign the products via products printed here and the product matrix to the appropriate printer, and you'll be all set. --- ## Message Customization and Localization While the vast majority of the Photo Finale platform is localized into a variety of languages, there are a limited number of strings that default to English but can be customized on a per-dealer basis by request through our support team. The following messages can be overridden to provide localization for a dealer's primary language, or simply customization to better reflect their brand. ### Customizable Messages | Name | Description | Default | |:-----------------------------------------------------|:------------------------------------------------|:---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| | mobile\_notification\_msg\_order\_shipped | SMS text when a mail order is marked complete | Your order #\{%order\_number%\} from \{%dealer\_name%\} has been shipped. Keep an eye on your mailbox! | | mobile\_notification\_msg\_order\_ready\_for\_pickup | SMS text when a pickup order is marked complete | Your order from \{%dealer\_name%\} (#\{%order\_number%\}) is now ready for pickup at \{%store\_name%\}. | | stripe\_charge\_description\_v2 | Transaction description for Stripe payments | \{%dealer\_name%\} Order #\{%order\_number%\} | --- ## Coupons and Promos *Learn how to set up coupons and promos in myLab and Lab 50, including product tagging, coupon codes, and campaign creation.* You will need myLab and Lab 50 to set up a promo.
| The date & local time of the delivery (today). | 9/20/2019 12:44:00 PM | | \{%shipment\_date%\} | Date the shipment was sent. | 9/12/2019 9:21:00 AM | | \{%shipment\_expected\_date%\} | Date the shipment is expected to arrive. Not available for all carriers / shipments. | 9/18/2019 | | \{%shipment\_status%\} | Package status reported by the carrier, grouped into one of these four buckets: Preparing to Ship, Shipped, Delivered, Shipping Exception | Delivered | | \{%shipment\_tracking\_number%\} | The carrier's tracking number. | 1Z2W322A0381541838 | | \{%shipment\_carrier\_code%\} | The name of the shipment carrier. | UPS MI | ### Item Macros These macros can be used within the <shipment\_items> or <unshipped\_items> sections. | Macro | Description | Example | |:---------------------|:-----------------------------|:-----------------------| | \{%item\_name%\}
| The product name. | 2'x8' Mesh Banner | | \{%item\_quantity%\} | The quantity of the product. | 2 | | \{%item\_status%\} | The status of the item. | Preparing for Shipment | ### Item Status For shipped items, the item status macro will result in one of our four friendly bucket strings listed above: - Preparing to Ship - Shipped - Delivered - Shipping Exception For unshipped items, it will be one of the standard PF order status values: - Placed - Received (Processing) - Sent to Lab - Preparing for Production - Color Correction in Progress - Order Ready for Production - In Production - Produced, Ready for Quality Check - Quality Review in Progress - Quality Review Passed - In Transit to Pickup Store - Ready for Pickup / Shipped - Cancelled - Error Status - On Hold - Order will not be processed until corrections are made ### Sample ```
mail | | | CustomerType | guest
member | | | OrderSource | web
app
kiosk
pro | | | ProductMix | local
supplier
both
supplier-or-both | | | PickupLocationId | <id> | This is the PF database ID for the specified location, which can be found by going to the Store Details page on myLab and grabbing the ID from the final section of the URL. For example "58114" if the URL was: https://mylab.photofinale.com/StoreManagement/Locations/Edit/58114 | | PickupLocationStoreNumber | <number> | This is the configured value in the "Store Number (Optional)" field on the Store Details page. | | IncludesProductTag | <tag> | If a product with the specified tag is in the order, the region will be shown. | #### Nested Regions Nested Regions are supported, for example: **Example OrderType Region Macro** ```xml HTML CONTENT: Your order is being fulfilled by a supplier, we'll call you when your order is ready for pickup in 7-10 business days. ``` #### Else Statements A region can include an "ELSE" clause, which will be shown if the region criteria is false, for example: **Example OrderType Region Macro** ```xml HTML CONTENT: Your order will be ready in 7-10 days. HTML CONTENT: Your order will be ready in 3-4 days. ``` ## Sample Lab 50 Triggered Messages, HTML [lab50-emails1.zip](..\..\..\..\..\attachments\.zip) ## Sample PDF shipping label form (copy the Google Sheet and edit, then download to pdf, send to PF) For use with this sample email: simple\_order-confirmation-2-for-film.html [https://docs.google.com/document/d/1-o5kRkHiOHUVZn8os7GosFSrXLJ1pTeeOx3iKfnA8u0/copy](https://docs.google.com/document/d/1-o5kRkHiOHUVZn8os7GosFSrXLJ1pTeeOx3iKfnA8u0/copy) --- ## Adding a House Account Payment Type When online payment is required in all orders, but the retailer wants to extend term payment to his house accounts and bill them on a periodic basis, rather than collecting their payment at the time of online order, you can take "payment" by "charge store account" and invoice them later. **To set up:** - In Lab 50: Store Mgmt > Payment Settings. - Add a new payment, choose Retail Store Account. - The number of digits can be set in the admin, so when the customer orders, he chooses to “pay with a store card” and enters his designated number. The order submits as long as the correct number of digits is entered, and shows in Lab 50 as “pay in store” (no number is included with the order).  **To invoice:** Each month (or other interval), the retailer runs the “**Online - Sales - Line Item Detail**” from myLab (more info [Reports](/mylab/reports/overview)) with the correct timeframe designated. The report would then be sorted by payment type to filter the orders where no payment type has been set (these are considered “unpaid online” (essentially “pay in store”), then sort by customer email address to group each house account’s orders for that billing period. --- ## Adding a VAT Rate *Learn how to add a VAT rate in Store Management by creating or editing a Tax Rule and saving your changes correctly.* To add a VAT: 1. Click on the **Store Management** tab on the top tab fields then **Tax Rules**  2. If you don’t have an existing Tax Rule, click on **New** or **Create a new Tax Rule**. If there’s an existing rule, double-click on this specific Tax Rule.  3. Once, the tax rule section open, please make sure you pick the **VAT** field in order to perform the change. Make sure you press **Save** to retain the changes  --- ## Configuring Credit Card Processing *Configure a payment gateway in Lab 50 so labs can require customers to pay for web orders online before printing.* The Photo Finale platform can be configured to accept credit card payments, so labs can require customers to pay for web orders at time of order creation before the lab prints the order. Photo Finale's preferred payment gateway partner is [Stripe](https://stripe.com), which is available in [51 countries](https://stripe.com/global), has an integrated & streamlined on-boarding experience, and supports the widest array of payment methods including: - Card payments (global and regional) - Mobile Wallets (ApplePay & Google Pay) - Stripe Link (one-click checkout) - Buy Now Pay Later (Affirm, Klarna) - Instant Bank Payment Additional supported gateways: - [Authorize.NET](https://www.authorize.net/) (US & CA) - [QuickPay](https://quickpay.net/) ([38 countries](https://quickpay.net/helpdesk/can-we-use-quickpay/) in Europe & UK) - [Braintree](https://www.braintreepayments.com/products/braintree-direct) (US, CA, Europe, Australia, New Zealand, Singapore, Hong Kong, and Malaysia) - [PayPal](http://paypal.com/) (US, CA, UK, Europe, AU, Asia) - [Moneris](https://www.moneris.com/en/solutions/ecommerce/moneris-gateway) (CA)
| | Creating a new Payment Method | ### Adding Payment Methods To setup the payment methods that will be accepted on the website, access the payment methods section by clicking on **Store Management > Payment Methods**, and enter the types of payments you would like to process. The box to *Process payments via e-commerce gateway* will need to be checked for each credit card option that is created. \*\***Note:** For PCI compliance, all credit cards must be processed through the online gateway as the credit card information cannot be sent to Lab 50 for manual processing. When order information is viewed in Lab 50, the transaction number will be available for review, but the credit card details will not be provided. Fields to complete include the following: - **Name:** Name to use for the form of payment or a house account. - **Process payments via e-commerce gateway:** Must be checked for online processing as of December 2009. - **Credit Card Number of Digits:** Mastercard, Visa, and Discover use 16 digits for credit card numbers while American Express uses 15 digits. A house account can be set to match your store's implementation. - **Require Expiration:** Will ask customers for Expiration date. Do not set this value for house accounts. - **Require CCV:** Will require customers to enter 3 digit verification code for Mastercard, Visa, and Discover, and 4 digits for American Express. Do not set this value for house accounts. - **Enabled:** Mark this payment method as active. - **Deleted:** Mark this payment method as deleted. --- ## Setting Tax Rules & Rates *Learn how to set up tax rules and rates in Lab 50 using the US tax table database or custom rules for states, ZIP codes, and shipping.* You have two choices for tax rate set-up: ### 1. Use our tax table database (US only). We use a tax table, which is updated on a regular basis, to calculate taxes, which are charged based on the delivery or pickup ZIP code. The tax database is updated 3 times a year and includes only US tax regions. To enable use of the tax table: 1. In **Lab 50,** click **Store Management > Application Settings > double-click Photo Finale > check-box is on the General tab.** 2. Then click **Save** (left sidebar)  ### 2. OR, you can set your own tax rules This can be either a single rate, or a ZIP-code based rate you enter yourself.. If you would like to set your own tax rules: 1. Disable the database tax table, as described above. **You must not have the database tax table enabled if you are going to define your own rules** 2. In **Lab 50,** click on **Store Management** > **Tax Rules**, then double-click on an existing rule to edit it or click on ***Create a new tax rule*** to setup a new tax option.  The configuration settings are the following: - **Name:** Enter a name for each tax rule. - **Tax description:** Select the type of tax rule you are creating. - **Tax rate:** Set the Tax Rate for each State/Province or ZIP Code. - **Tax shipping:** Select if shipped items to State/Province or ZIP Code are taxable. - **Apply on top of other taxes:** Select this option if this tax is charged in addition to other taxes. - **Apply to all orders:** Select whether or not this applies for all order types. - **Apply to the selected states/provinces/regions:** Choose one or more states/provinces/regions with the same tax rate - **Apply to the specified zip codes:** Add the ZIP Code(s) and apply this tax rule to orders from these specific areas. - **Enabled:** Mark this tax rule as active. - **Deleted:** Mark this tax rule as deleted. **Canadian dealers should set up rules like this to cover GST and HST for the various provinces (check the rates, this screenshot is for demo only)**  # FAQ: **Q:** Is there a way to tax items in shipped orders? **A:** Yes. The setup depends on whether the dealer is using the US Tax Database, Tax Rules, or a Flat Tax. With the US Tax Database, tax is automatically charged for shipped orders based on the zip code & county of the shipped order if the dealer has tax nexus in a state. By default they have tax nexus in every state that they have store locations (on our platform). If a dealer wants to charge tax in a state in which they don't currently have store locations, they can either add a dummy store location in that state (with "customer pickup" disabled) or they can give us a list of the states and we can set it in the database in a nexus override property (introduced in PF 13.5). Since it would be a pain to create more than a few dummy stores, the new nexus override property is definitely the way to go. The override list needs to be a lowercase string of comma-separated postal abbreviations. Once you have it, send it to support with your dealer code please. **Example:** "ca,co,dc,ga,il,in,ia,ky,la,md,me,mi,mn,nc,nd,ne,nj,nv,ok,ri,sd,ut,va,wa,wi,wv" **Q:** Is there a way to see what taxes are configured in the Tax DB? **A:** There's no way for the dealer to see it but we can run a query from the database and export to XLS for you. --- ## Setting the Rush Order Charge ### Overview The Rush Order Charge is a simple, dealer-enabled option that customers are presented with during checkout, as part of the Checkout Options page.  ### Configuration Configuration of the option is done in Lab 50 > Store Management > Application Settings > Ordering, in a new "Rush Charge" groupbox. There are four configurable settings: - Amount. A number spinner, similar to the one used in the Service Charge section. - Rush Charge Label. The name used for this fee, defaults to "Rush Fee". (currently max of 32 characters) - Rush Charge Description. A multi-line text field with space for a maximum of 1024 characters. (Optional) - Notification Email. A text field accepting an email address to be notified when a rush order is placed. (Optional) ### Site Behavior A Rush Order checkbox along with the price and description will be displayed on the mobile Checkout Options page. The label used for the checkbox, as well as the description and price, come from the settings set in Lab 50. If selected, the Rush Order Charge will be displayed on the checkout summary page, as well as the order summary panels shown on the other checkout pages and cart page. The charge line will be labeled using the name from Lab 50 settings, and will be placed immediately after the location of the Service Charge line. ### Notification Email If the dealer has setup a notification email, when a Rush Order is placed, a message is sent to the supplied address. - Subject: "Photo Finale: Rush Order - #26035882" - Body: - Order #26035882 - Total: $23.52 - Date Placed:08/25/16 6:20pm - Customer: Jason Pareti, [jason@photofinale.com](mailto:jason@photofinale.com), 703.568.4242 - Pickup Location: Ritz Camera Bethesda Mall ### Lab 50 / Print 50 Behavior Rush Orders will display a new icon in Lab 50 / Print 50 to indicate their status and alert operators.  The Rush Order fee will also be displayed in the order total summary. ### Order Confirmation Macros Rush Order charges will need to be shown in the order confirmation emails as well as Lab 50/Print 50 invoices. If you use these and enable the Rush Fee, make sure to add the macro to your email and invoice files. See: [Configuring Emails](/store-setup/order-completion-notifications/editing-email-messages) and [Lab 50 Invoice Customizations and Macros](/print-50/lab-50-troubleshooting-and-faqs/lab-50-invoice-customizations-and-macros) --- ## Shipping *Learn how Photo Finale's base, product-quantity, and weight-based shipping charges combine, and how to configure each in Lab 50 and myLab.* ## How to set up shipping on your PF site A common setup is to set a flat rate per a defined set of products (one price for small prints, one for large prints and calendars, one for posters, one for cards, one for gifts, one for books). We have a hybrid shipping pricing system that can combine both base charges & weight-based fees in addition to product-quantity-based charges. Some dealers will then discount the shipping (using promos) for orders over a certain amount… "Free shipping on orders over $35!" ### Quick overview: how shipping is calculated **S&H = A + B + C**, where: - **A** = Base Shipping Price (if set… set in Lab 50) - **B** = Product-Quantity-Based Shipping for products contained in shipping product groups (if set… set in myLab) - **C** = Weight-based additional fees for combined weight of products (excluding products already counted in B) (if set… set in Lab 50)
Date: \{%order\_date%\}
Shipping Method: \{%shipping\_method%\}
Buyer Name: \{%customer\_first\_name%\} \{%customer\_last\_name%\}
Buyer Email: \{%customer\_email%\}
Buyer Phone: \{%billto\_phone%\}
Total: \{%order\_total%\}
Shipping Total: \{%order\_shipping\_total%\}
Ship-to Name: \{%shipto\_first\_name%\} \{%shipto\_last\_name%\}
Ship-to Email: \{%shipto\_email%\}
Ship-to Phone: \{%shipto\_phone%\}
Ship-to Street: \{%shipto\_street%\}
Ship-to City: \{%shipto\_city%\}
Ship-to Region: \{%shipto\_region%\}
Ship-to Country: \{%shipto\_country%\}
Ship-to Postal Code: \{%shipto\_postalcode%\} | 3. In Zapier, create a new Zap and add the first Step: Email Parser by Zapier. This will create an inbox to receive the order emails at, it will look like something like [namehere4156789@robot.zapier.com](mailto:persnickety596102@robot.zapier.com). Copy the email address it generates. No one will see this one either. 4. Back in your email program, you want to filter all your order emails so you are only sending along the Shipping orders to the Zapier parser. (Zapier charges per "zap" so best to use email to filter rather than Zapier.) Set up a filter based on something standard in your email... if you have set shipping method names, you can use that as your parameter (ie, words in the subject), so you email program only forwards orders that need a label to the Zapier parser email address. 5. Now in Zapier, you can either place an order, or fake one by sending a message from your normal email to that special email you set up in step 1, using the template as the body (you can put in fake info) and your shipping method as the subject (to mimic an order email). Now, you can set up the parser in Zapier based on the info received. 6. Once you have the parser set up, add Step 2 to Zapier, which is called "Create Order in ShipStation" and follow the prompts to connect up that info with your ShipStation account ... The Zap will now look like this: 1.  7. Then test, test, test! --- ## Uploading Film/Slide/Photo Scans & Restoration Jobs to a PF Site/Account If you offer film developing with scan-to-digital, photo scans, slide scans, or restoration jobs, you CAN (and should!) upload the finished work so that a customer can easily download the images or add them to her account! - ## **BEST METHOD:** **PRO Uploader Tool** ## **Consumer owns the scans and it's EASIER and FASTER for lab staff, plus, LESS MISTAKES!** ## >> [See the PRO Uploader page for all the details!](/store-setup/uploading-scans-and-restoration-jobs/pro-uploader) << - **Sharing methods that are more work:** 1. 1. **GOOD - "Just viewing" Methods:** A) Create an account on your regular PF site with a general email and upload the scans to albums on that, then share the album (go to Collection Settings > Privacy). or B) Use a PF Proofing site and upload into "Events" via myLab. - Pro: No account lookup needed. If you needed to protect the images from download, you could turn on the watermark which would turn off the download button on a regular PF site. - Pro: If you are using a PF Proofing site, there's no special linking needed, you just tell consumers to go to that site and find their image set (however you archive). Event album covers can be blurred for privacy. - Either: If *wanted* user to be able to download, they could on a regular PF site by not watermarking. Users cannot currently download images from a Proofing site. - Con: The album isn’t in an account and they always need the link to access it so re-ordering or integrating with their other photos is not straightforward. 2. **BETTER - "Logging in as the customer and uploading" Method:** Even better – upload the scans right into the user’s account on your regular PF site. If they don’t have one, you create it for them. If they do have one, you can Log In as Customer from myLab (go into the acct, click the button, or use the Generate One-Time Pass, that temp pass is good for a 1 hour window). Log in, then upload, just like consumers do. - Pro: The scans are part of the person’s account, and it’s easy for them to use to order from. And, anything to get members into your site is good. They can also download the images if they want. - Con: You have collect the email beforehand (and ensure it's right), then look up (or create) the account. There is no way to prevent them from downloading the full res, since that watermark setting is one they would have access to turn on/off. You have to communicate with them once it's done (there's not an email trigger for this). - Tips: - Standardize how you title the albums so they know what it is...their last name and the date...something to set it apart from personal uploads. They can always change it. Fill in the description too. - Make sure to use Large upload so the biggest version is there for them to print with. You can even give them a special coupon code to encourage printing their new scans. - Tell your customers how to download the images (single image download can be done by clicking the image, then clicking the Download button. Or, select multiple, then click the download button. To just download the whole collection, click Collection Settings, then Download Zip.  - - - - When the upload is done, tell the customer. To email them from your store email, go to Collection Settings > Privacy & Sharing and grab the link, then email it from your store account. If you change the Sharing link to Public, you will also be able to copy the link to their account collections (good if you have created more than one folder).   - - - - Or, from within the Collection, click the Share button, and email the customer from there. This email will use the Share Album triggered email template that you have set up in Lab 50 (so make sure you have that trigger set up, and the message makes sense–keep in mind that it's the same email that will get sent when a user shares a collection).  --- ## PRO Uploader *Learn how PRO Uploader handles logins, licensing, pricing, digital upload products, scan link expiration, and supported operating systems.* ## PRO Uploader Demo (Build 34) ## General FAQs - **What is my login?** - Same as myLab and Lab/Print 50. - **How do I sign up** - [https://www.photofinale.com/go](https://www.photofinale.com/go) > slick Order a Bundle and then Film & Scan Bundle. The license will show up on your myLab Dashboard when we have added it, then you will be able to log in and start uploading! - **What if someone comes up to the counter with their film?** - You can manually enter an order into the PRO Uploader Tool. We do recommend keeping your film handling the same across web, kiosk, mobile, and in-store, it makes things easier all around! You are NOT charged the rev share commission on orders placed at kiosk or entered direction in the PRO Uploader. - **When do emails get sent? // Explain Upload Complete in PRO vs Order Complete in myLab** - The “Upload Complete” and “Order Complete” are two different things. The “Your scans are ready” email is sent automatically when the “Upload Complete” occurs in PRO. The order complete is separate. For example, if the customer ordered a scan + prints products, or if they had other non-scanning products in their cart, then it’s up to the operator to Complete the order once everything is ready. That will trigger the typical “Order Shipped” or “Order Ready to Pick Up” email. - **What is the "Updated" column as it pertains to orders in the uploader?** - The “Updated” column is the last time the order was updated. The most-recently uploaded order should always appear at top. Originally it showed the order date, but because dealers don’t necessarily work on things in order it got confusing to upload an order and then not be able to see it in the list if it happened to be an older order and was bumped down under a long list of others. - **Can I install it on more than one computer?** - The license is priced per location, but you are allowed unlimited installs within each location. - **What does it cost** - The license is an up-front fee (contact your Sales Rep), then monthly based on your tier. Your tier level is shown on your myLab Dashboard and explained here: [https://www.photofinale.com/bundles](https://www.photofinale.com/bundles) - Revenue share is charged on orders placed on your website, but not on kiosk or PRO Upload direct orders. - **How does the system know which products on my site are for upload service?** - The product must be designated a "digital upload" product in your catalog. [Here is a list of products to use.](https://docs.google.com/spreadsheets/d/1dUpN6kY9hyWcggoedpJFzdvTsUMGtlQISNvha1RrIsg/edit?usp=sharing) - If you have an existing product you want to use, just click into the product and check the "Digital Upload Product" box. - **How long does the link to my scans work?** - Uploads are standalone collections available for access for 30 days via the link in the upload-complete email. Users may choose to add the uploads to their account when they are viewing them. - **Upload and sizing notes:** - JPGs only. - Photos over 8k x 8k pixels may be downsized to such. - No limit on the number of photos in a collection. - A maximum of 10 collections per upload order. - **What OS is supported?** - Windows 10, Windows 11 - Windows 8.1 will be supported until Jan 10, 2023 (when Microsoft support ends) - Mac - plan to have an installer, not yet released as of 1/1/22 - **How do you pick folders for upload and name collections?** - You can select multiple folders at a time, and use a combo of your folder and template settings to achieve the desired result. Here is a good workflow example: --- ## Adding and Enabling Outsourced Products *Learn how to add and enable outsourced products in Photo Finale using myLab or Lab 50, including in-store and third-party fulfillment setup.* Photo Finale Website > Photo Finale Site Setup > [3rd Party Fulfillment (aka Marketplace)](..\3rd%20Party%20Fulfillment%20(aka%20Marketplace).md) Photo Finale offers local/in-store and third-party fulfillment options. Contact the fulfiller to set up your account, then we will add access to their catalog of products. See: photofinale.com/marketplace With the catalog sharing feature, you can select to keep the products you already create in-house as in-store products while sending out for fulfillment other items you'd like to offer for pick-up. ## myLab (Recommended Method): We will share the catalog to you in myLab, you can then import it and remove what you do not want to offer via that supplier. (Basically: Click into the disabled Fulfiller category that PF has added. Open the category to move, change the Parent to where you want to move it to, check off "enable" and click OK.) Visual... ##### Lab 50 (Legacy Method): myLab is quicker. But for Lab 50, here is info. **** **** **** **** 1. Click on **Store Management** > **Product Catalog**. 2. Select the *"All Products"* folder at the top of the list on the left panel. 3. For each product you would like to offer, highlight the product in the list on the right panel by left-clicking on it. 4. Right-click on the highlighted line and choose *Enable the selected product*. ##### To enable gifts for in-store processing: 1. In the *"All Products"* folder at the top of the list on the left panel, expand the menu selections and then select *"Folio Gifts"*. 2. Next, enable the products as given in the steps above for items you'd like to process ***In-Store*** only. 3. To enable multiple products at once, select the first product you'd like to offer, then hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard while carefully selecting each subsequent product. 4. Once all of your products have been highlighted, right-click anywhere within the listing and choose *Enabled the selected products*. 5. To verify that the products are enabled, check for a small green dot to the left of the product name. It should turn green for each enabled item. 6. Lastly, the products will need to be added to your existing web catalog. The catalog currently in use on your website will be indicated by a blue circle with checkmark. You can add products to existing categories or elect to create new categories for your gift products. NOTE: the catalog of products available for in store processing is not identical to the EQ Gifting program. There may be differences in product specs and in the products offered. ##### To enable gifts for processing via third-party production 1. Scroll to the bottom of the left panel and expand the option for *Supplier Catalogs*. 2. Next, select *"XX Fulfillment."* . 3. You may either import the entire catalog, which pulls over all products, product hierarchy and group icons, or you may choose to enable individual products. First, click into the Fulfillment supplier catalogs and enable the products you want to offer: 1. Click into each to expand the individual categories to find the products you would like to offer for pick-up in-store. 2. Enable the products as given in the steps above for items you'd like to process via Lucidiom Fulfillment only. 3. To enable multiple products at once, select the first product you'd like to offer, then hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard while carefully selecting each subsequent product. 4. Once all of your products have been highlighted, right-click anywhere within the listing and choose *Enabled the selected products*. To verify that the products are enabled, check for a small green dot to the left of the product name. It should turn green for each enabled item. 4. To import the entire catalog (for most users this is recommended for the EQ Gifting catalog) 1. Right click on your default catalog (the one with the blue check) 2. Select Import > From Supplier > Lucidiom Fulfillment > EQ Gifting 5. Or, to pick and choose products (for most users this will be the process by which to add selected products from the catalogs) to add: 1. Click into your default catalog (blue circle with checkmark), create a new category or click into an existing one and click Add Product. Browse to the supplier catalog and select the product(s) you want to offer. --- ## 3rd Party Fulfillment (aka Marketplace) *Learn how dealers can add, price, and fulfill 3rd party Marketplace products in Photo Finale, from catalog setup to shipping and payment options.* #### For Dealers: General Info We have a list of partners who offer fulfillment services on our platform. Some of these are strictly fulfillment/production companies, some are content providers and some are retail photofinishers who are offering a selection of products they produce for other retailers to offer. All catalogs are available online and on kiosk via the PF@Kiosk feature. You can find the complete list of Marketplace Partners here: [https://www.photofinale.com/marketplace/](https://www.photofinale.com/marketplace/). To start offering one of these Marketplace Partners' catalogs of products, contact the partner. They will get you signed up with an account on their end, then they will notify us that you have been approved to offer their catalog of products. We will grant your PF account access to their catalog, and send you an email with instructions. **For Dealers: Adding the Products** 1. **Import the whole catalog:** In Lab 50, go to the supplier's catalog (Product Catalog, left sidebar at the bottom), enable everything. Go to your default catalog, right-click and choose Import Supplier Catalog, then click through to the desired catalog. \*\* This will copy all of the groups and products into your catalog. Before you import, compare your default catalog's existing group structure to ensure it does not match the supplier's, as this will cause an issue. If there is a conflict, rename your groups or add products another way. 2. **Pepper in the new products:** You can use Lab 50 or myLab for this method. Navigate to the group where you want the product, click Add Product and find the fulfiller's product and add it. These methods are shown in this video: 3. **Cover your wholesale and shipping costs:** 1. The suppliers generally include an MSRP, good product name and clear description...but not always! Please make sure to check each product you are offering for correct pricing. You should communicate shipping cost and terms as part of the product name, group and/or description. For ease of setup, we recommend that you include the shipping cost in with the price of the item. You can also set up shipping groups, flat base rates, and pricing by weight...check out the page on [Shipping](/store-setup/shipping/overview) for other options. 2. You and the supplier should agree on wholesale prices, shipping costs and terms, delivery terms, return policy and invoicing terms prior to the supplier requesting us to grant you access to the catalog. Photo Finale is not party to your agreements. Our % fee is the same off of these products as it is with all your other online offerings. Be sure you factor this in to your costs. #### For Dealers: Operations 1. **Collect payment!** You cannot require payment specifically for third party products, but you can require payment for all online orders or all online orders over a certain amount. We highly recommend you set this–to set, in Lab 50, go to: Store Management > Application Settings > Order tab. If you offer shipping but have no payment requirement, you won't get paid for the product. 2. **Delivering the order:** You should discuss shipping options and how you are charged for shipping with your supplier. There are a number of ways to deliver the order. 1. **Ship to store:** Some suppliers only ship back to the store (oftentimes they group and ship weekly for cost savings) for pickup even if the consumer selected "mail" so it is up to the retailer to ship it out...if you desire this option, you must clarify with the supplier. 2. **Consumer choice:** You can offer your standard in-store and/or mail just like you probably do for your in-house products. But, keep in mind you need to communicate the delivery time will be longer for these items than ones you produce in-house, and, because the supplier still has to ship the item to you, there is still a shipping cost to cover. 3. **Force mail delivery of third party products:** Using myLab's "Store Location Product Fulfillment" setting you can set a store location to only allow pickup of certain items. Any products that are not included in the fulfillment settings will be forced as a shipped order. To set this up, in myLab, navigate to Store Management > Store Locations > select the location > select the product fulfillment tab you will see where to set this up. Essentially every single item that should be available for in-store pickup will need to be included in the product fulfillment section. If a store has multiple locations this will need to be done for each location. Any items left off the fulfillment list will be force shipped. 3. **Consumer expectations:** Most retailers offer a mix of in-house and third-party-fulfilled products. There is not a setting to communicate various delivery times based on products, so you must handle this some way, so your customers know what to expect. We have seen some good communications by retailers including: 1. Included a note in the product group and/or modify the product group icon. Ex: One group called “In-store Books: 3 days” and a second named “Specialty Books: 7-10 Days.” 2. Edit your Order Confirmation email with a note on varying delivery times. 3. Include details in the product name and/or description. 4. **Who ordered what?** 1. You will see the product come through your Lab 50 and you can run a report to see products your customers have ordered from your suppliers. **myLab.photofinale.com > Reports > Online - Line Item Status by Supplier** **** **Lab 50 display**  **myLab Report** ## View an excel [for-retailer.xlsx](..\..\..\attachments\.xlsx) #### For Suppliers: General Info Contact Photo Finale to get started on our platform. We have a large library of products you can offer to start, and can work with you to add your custom products. When a dealer contacts you, we recommend that you both agree on wholesale prices, shipping costs and terms, delivery terms, return policy and invoicing terms prior to the supplier requesting us to grant you access to the catalog. Photo Finale is not party to your agreements. Our % fee is the same off of these products as it is with all the dealer's other online offerings. Once you have set them up, let us know via an online form. We take about 2 business days to grant them access to your catalog. We maintain a list of partners on our website and request logo, 1-line summary, email, phone, delivery region and a link to your product catalog (website or pdf). [https://www.photofinale.com/partner-programs/marketplace/](https://www.photofinale.com/partner-programs/marketplace/) #### For Suppliers: Product Catalog Changes You are responsible for communicating about changes to your catalog going forward, and about your holiday ordering deadlines. You are free to offer incentives, specials, sample kits and marketing programs. Once your catalog is shared to a dealer, they have a copy of it and may alter it (although cannot print the items locally). This means that any price changes or product additions/deletions you make in your master catalog will not be pushed out to the dealers who offer your catalog. You should maintain a good line of communication so that you are able to tell them when things change. Most often, you will have a new product or set that you will add...we can help with the directions retailers will need to add your new products to their websites. #### For Suppliers: Collecting Orders Just as with a photofinishing dealer, orders for you to fulfill are collected in Lab 50 and reports are accessible via myLab . This Lab 50 is from a photofinisher who is also a supplier to other dealers. The highlighted order and the two above it are from other dealers who offer her catalog and the rest of the orders are from her own customers using her website. #### For Suppliers: Invoicing  Invoice terms and what wholesale and shipping costs are owed, are between you and the dealer, but if you need a record of what dealers' customers have ordered, use the **myLab > Report > Online – Catalog Subscriber Line Item Detail** which can be run for a settable timeframe and exported in a variety of formats. #### For Suppliers: Best Practices We will share that catalog out and the other dealer will import it… so whatever you put in is what they will get, and in those groups with all the details along with it. These are changes usually made: 1. Pricing—MSRP and wholesale 2. Product names, descriptions, images 3. Category images, descriptions Other notes: 1. If there is a turnaround stated, for example, you may want to remove that from a description since it will be different for the other dealer. Or, anything that may detail your dealer name (except for the one top level category, that is the only spot you need your name/logo and it’s not used on the dealer’s site. 2. A supplier catalog cannot have any disabled products or categories. If you have groups or products you do not want to offer for wholesale, or aren’t ready yet, please delete. If you have a linked photo cover category which would normally be disabled in a dealer catalog must be enabled in the supplier catalog. 3. If you decide to discontinue or need to temporarily remove a product (due to inventory, for example) we have a way to do that across all dealers you supply, we just need the product info (product name, ID, and database ID). 4. SHIPPING. This is always a tough one to sort out. The shipping settings that are in the dealer catalog are what gets applied. So you need to make sure to communicate to the dealer how you want to do shipping so that they can set it up to appropriately cover costs. Shipping for their customer may be different that what you actually charge the dealer, so just as long as you are clear on terms and fees and that your shipping settings in the supplier catalog do not carry through. For this reason, some dealers include shipping in the product msrp and wholesale. ## View an excel [for-supplier.xlsx](..\..\..\attachments\.xlsx) ---